s^. 


^^^.v 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


/////  ^^    ^ 


1.0 


1.1 


"IB    |M 


Z  Itt   12.0 


IL25  H u  ii.6 


.V 


V 


I^tographic 

^Sciences 

Carporation 


^ 


> 


3>' 


<^ 


^:%^  ^^ 


23  WBT  MAIN 
WItSTIR.N.Y. 


ITRIIT 

usto 


(716)t72-4S03 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHIVI/ICIN/IH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Inttituta  for  Historical  iMicroraproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  da  microraproductions  historiquat 


Technical  and  Bibliographic  Notea/Notoa  tachniquas  at  bibliographiquaa 


Tha  Inatituta  has  attamptad  to  obtain  tha  baat 
original  copy  availabia  for  filming.  Faaturaa  of  thia 
copy  which  may  ba  bibliographically  uniqua, 
which  may  altar  any  of  tha  imagaa  in  tha 
raproduction,  or  which  may  significantly  changa 
tha  uaual  mathod  of  filming,  ara  chaclcad  balow. 


n 


D 


D 


D 


D 


Coiourad  covara/ 
Couvartura  da  coulaur 


I     I    Covara  damagad/ 


Couvartura  andommagte 

Covara  rastorad  and/or  laminatad/ 
Couvartura  raataurte  at/ou  palliculAa 


I     I   Covar  titia  miaaing/ 


La  titra  da  couvartura  manqua 

Coiourad  mapa/ 

Cartaa  gtegrephiquaa  mi  coulaur 

Coiourad  ink  (i.a.  othar  than  blua  or  black)/ 
Encra  da  coulaur  (i.a.  autra  qua  biaua  ou  noira) 


rn   Coiourad  plataa  and/or  illuatratlona/ 


Planchaa  at/ou  iiluatrations  an  coulaur 

Bound  with  othar  material/ 
Raiii  avac  d'autraa  documanta 


Q   Tight  binding  may  causa  ahadowa  or  diatortion 
along  interior  margin/ 

La  r9  liura  serrAe  peut  cauaar  da  I'ombra  ou  de  la 
diatortion  la  long  da  la  marge  IntArieure 


Blank  laavaa  added  during  reatoration  may 
appear  within  tha  text.  Whenever  poaaibia,  theee 
have  been  omitted  from  filming/ 
II  se  peut  que  certainaa  pagee  blanchea  ajouttee 
lors  d'une  reatauration  apparaiaaant  dana  la  texte, 
mala,  ioraqua  cela  6tait  poaaibia,  caa  pagea  n'ont 
pas  4t«  fiimAea. 

Additional  oommanta:/ 
Commentairee  aupplAmantairae: 


L'Institut  a  microfilm^  la  meiileur  exemplaira 
qu'il  lui  a  4tA  poaaibia  de  se  procurer.  Les  dttaila 
da  cet  exemplaira  qui  font  paut-Atre  uniques  du 
point  de  vue  bibliographiqaa,  qui  peuvent  modifier 
une  image  reproduite,  ou  qui  peuvent  exiger  une 
modification  dana  la  mAthoda  normala  de  f iimega 
aont  indlqute  cl-deaaoua. 

□  Coloured  pagea/ 
Pagea  da  coulaur 

□   Pagea  damaged/ 
Pages  endommegies 

I — I   Pages  restored  and/or  laminated/ 


D 


Pages  restaurAea  at/ou  pellicuiAea 

Pagea  diacoloured,  atainad  or  foxed/ 
Pagea  dAcolorAaa.  tachattea  ou  piquAas 


□   Pagea  detached/ 
Pagea  dAtachiaa 

0Showthrough/ 
Transparence 


Transparence 

Quality  of  prir 

QuaiitA  inigale  de  I'lmpreaalon 

Includea  aupplamentary  matarii 
Comprend  du  material  supplimentaira 

Only  edition  available/ 
Seuie  Mition  diaponlbia 


•n 

to 


Tl 

PC 

of 
fil 


Oi 
bs 
th 
sk 
ot 
fir 
sl< 
or 


I     I   Quality  of  print  variea/ 

|~~1   Includea  aupplamentary  material/ 

I — I   Only  edition  available/ 


Pagea  wholly  or  partially  obscured  by  errata 
alipa,  tiaauee,  etc.,  have  been  ref timed  to 
enaura  tha  beat  poaaibia  image/ 
Lea  pagea  totalament  ou  partieliement 
obacurciaa  par  un  feulllet  d'errata,  una  pelure, 
etc.,  ont  4ti  filmAea  A  nouveeu  de  fa^on  i 
obtenir  la  maiiieure  image  possible. 


Th 
sh 
Til 
wl 

Ml 
dif 
en 
bei 
rig 
rec 
mi 


This  item  is  filmed  at  the  reduction  ratio  checked  below/ 

Ce  document  eat  film*  au  taux  da  reduction  indiqui  cl-deaaoua 

10X                          14X                           1IX                          22X 

26X 

aox 

V 

12X 


1«X 


20X 


24X 


28X 


32X 


Th*  copy  fllfiMd  fmn  hat  bMn  r«produc«d  thanks 
to  tho  gonorotity  of: 

Ubrary  of  tha  Public 
Archives  of  Canada 

Tha  imagas  appearing  hara  ara  tha  bast  quality 
possibia  consMaring  tha  condition  and  lagibllity 
of  tha  original  copy  and  in  Itsaping  with  tha 
filming  contract  spacifications. 


Original  capias  in  printad  papar  covers  ara  filmad 
beginning  with  the  front  cover  and  ending  on 
the  last  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, or  the  beck  cover  when  eppropriate.  All 
other  original  copies  ere  filmed  beginning  on  the 
first  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, and  ending  on  the  laat  page  with  a  printed 
or  illustreted  impression. 


The  lest  recorded  frame  on  eech  microfiche 
shell  contein  the  symbol  -^>  (meer<ing  "CON- 
TINUED"), or  the  symbol  y  (meaning  "END"), 
whichever  applies. 

Maps,  plates,  cherts,  etc.,  may  be  filmed  at 
different  reduction  ratios.  Those  too  large  to  be 
entirely  included  in  one  exposure  are  filmed 
beginning  in  the  upper  left  hand  corner,  left  to 
right  end  top  to  bottom,  as  many  frames  as 
required.  The  following  diagrams  illustrate  the 
method: 


U'exemplaira  film*  f ut  reproduit  grflce  A  la 
ginArosit*  da: 

1^  bibiiothdque  des  Archives 
publiques  du  Canada 

Las  images  suivantas  ont  AtA  reproduites  avac  la 
plus  grand  soin,  compta  tenu  de  la  condition  at 
da  la  nattet*  de  I'exemplaire  film«,  et  en 
conformity  avac  las  conditions  du  contrat  de 
filmage. 

Lea  exemplaires  originaux  dont  la  couverture  an 
papier  est  imprimte  sont  filmte  en  commenpant 
per  le  premier  plat  et  en  terminant  soit  par  la 
darnlAre  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration,  soit  par  le  second 
plet,  sslon  le  cas.  Tous  las  autras  exemplaires 
originaux  sont  filmte  en  commen^ant  par  la 
pramiire  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration  et  en  terminant  par 
la  darniire  page  qui  comporte  une  telle 
empreinte. 

Un  des  symboles  suivants  apparaftra  sur  la 
darnlAre  imege  de  cheque  microfiche,  selon  le 
cas:  la  symbols  -^  signifie  "A  SUIVRE",  le 
symbols  y  signifie  "FIN". 

Les  cartes,  planches,  tableaux,  etc.,  peuvent  Atra 
filmte  k  des  taux  de  reduction  diff«rents. 
Lorsque  le  document  est  trop  grand  pour  Atre 
reproduit  en  un  seul  clichA,  ii  est  film*  A  psrtir 
de  I'angle  supArieur  gauche,  de  gauche  A  droite, 
et  de  haut  en  bas,  en  pranant  le  nombre 
d'images  nAcessaira.  Les  disgrammes  suivants 
illustrent  le  mAthode. 


1 

2 

3 

32X 


1 

2 

3 

4 

6 

6 

\,' 


'Vy 


HAND  BOOK  FOR  RIFLEMEN; 


COITTAINIXO 


THE  FIRST  PRINCIPLES 

or 

MILITARY  DISCIPLINE, 

FOUNDED  ON  RATIONAL  METHOD; 
TO  EXPLAIN   IN   A  FAMILIAR  AND   PRACTICAL  MANNER* 

THE 

DISCIPLINE  AND  DUTIES 

or 

BIFLE  COUPS: 

CONFORMABLE  TO  THE  SYSTEM  ESTABLISHED  FOR  THE 

UNITED  STATES*  MILITARY  FORCE, 

THE  LATEST  IMPROVEMENTS 

IX  THE  MOBEBX  ART  OF  WAE, 


I.    • 

•J.  :  •    ■  I 


!,...ii; 


THIRD   EDITION. 


BY  WILLIAM  DUANE, 

ADJtrrJiirr  getibbal  i^r  the  army  of  the  vkited  states. 


Immortal  libert3r  your  souls  inspire. 

With  munly  patience  and  heroic  fire, 

The  niUest  shocks  of  fortune's  storm  to  bear,  > 

Each  ill  to  conquer,  every  death  to  dare ;  > 

It^o  ru»h  undaunted  in  ttie  advent w'Btu  van. 

And  meet  the  Britons,  man  opiiosed  to  man. 

With  suHsn  aim Hdmpurets. 


PHILADELPHLi. 
PRINTED   FOR  THE   AUTHOR. 


1813. 


1 1 


n  p  *"^  p,  c  n 


H 


m^- 


A 


'if  if,  <    "' ' 


;  s:    ;  ffs 


r  I.  .     .11-      >  I.  » 


!.0) 


i.l'    .^' 


lO'l  I  ■•<l. 


-  1    ■ .  (    , 


<\ 


JJJSTliJCT  OF  PEJ^rjYSYLVAmJi,  to  wit  : 

*♦.....»  BE  IT  REMEMBERED,  that  on  the  20th  day  of  July,  in  the 
«  L  S  •  thirty-seventh  year  of  the  Independence  of  the  United  States  of 
»  '  '  •  America,  A.  D.  1812,  William  Duane,  of  the  said  district,  hath  de- 
»««•••«*  posited  in  titis  office,  the  title  of  a  book,  the  right  whereof  he  claims 
"  as  author,  in  the  words  following,  to  wit:  "A  Hand  Book  for  Riflemen  : 
'*  containing  the  First  Principles  of  Military  Discipline,  Founded  on  Rational 
"  Method ;  intended  to  explain  in  a  familiar  and  practical  manner,  the 
*'  Discipline  and  Duties  uf  Rifle  Corps :  Comformable  to  the  system  established 
*'  for  the  United  Sutes'  Military  Force,  and  the  latest  improTements  in  the 
"  Modern  Art  of  War.    By  William  Duane. 

« Immortal  liberty  your  souls  inspire, 

"  With  manly  patience  and  heroic  fire, 

"  The  rudest  shocks  of  fortune's  storm  to  bear, 

"  Each  ill  to  conquer,  every  death  to  dare ; 

"  To  rxuh  utulaunted  in  the  adventurous  vatt, 

"  And  meet  the  Britons,  mau  opposed  to  man, 

"With  surer  aim Humphreys." 

In  conformity  to  the  act  of  the  congress  of  the  United  States,  intituled  "an 
act  for  the  encouragement  of  learning,  by  securingthc  copies  of  maps,  charts, 
and  books,  to  the  authors  and  proprietors  of  such  copies  during  the  times 
therein  mentioned;"  And  also  to  the  act,  entitled  "an  act  supplementary  to 
an  act,  entitled  '  an  act  for  the  encouragement  of  learning,  b^  securing  the 
copies  of  maps,  charts,  and  books,  to  tlie  authors  and  proprietors  of  such 
copies  during  the  times  therein  mentioned,'  and  extending  the  benefits 
thereof  to  the  arts  of  designing,  engraving,  and  etching  historical  and  other 
print*" 

D.  CALDWELL, 
"^  Ch-rk  nf  til'!  Diitrict  of  Pennnidvaiiia. 

■J 


026690 


:"   "/"  1. 


CONTENTS. 


CHAP.  I.    Of  Military  Discipline,   ......    vagvA 

.,.-^,     §  1.  Difference  between  an  army  and  a  mob  con< 
,^,,^.  sists  in  discipline,  which  produces  the  effect 

,        .1.  .    of  one  will,  through  suboi-dination. 

All  troops  should  learn  infantry  movements  first... 

otherwise  fatal  errors  arise. 
§  2.  Origin  of  rifle  corps....American  revolution.../' 
Yager8....French  revolution....tirailleurs....vol> 
ti{^er8....General    Lloyd....Baron    Gross.,.. 
Colonel  Macdonald....General  Howe....Gene* 
.     ral  Williamson. 

CHAP.  II.  On  the  Drill  of  Riflemen, 9 

^  1.  How  it  should  be  conducted....Prejudices 
which  prevent  rifle  discipline....The  opinion 
of  an  enemy....Colonel  Ehwald  of  the  Hes- 
sians,...Fatal  effects  of  sycophancy  in  ob> 
structing  military  knowledge. 

§  2.  The  first  drills  exactly  as  infantry  of  the  line 
,,  ^  ....ranking  and  sizing.,..telling  off. ...marking 

time. 

§3.  Facing  with  moving  feet....Indian  file.,. .In- 
dian pace. 

§  4.  Marching  and  facing. 

§  S.  Marching  and  wheeling  in  single  files. 

CHAP.  III.  Movements  by  half  platoons  or  half  com- 
panies,     .       IS 

§  1 .  Use  of  dividing  into  sections....in  what  consists  -> 

the  difference  of  the  movements  of  riflemen 
and  the  infantry  in  line,  applied  to  drills.... 
telling  off  from  right  to  left  by  the  voice,  and  ."'. 

wheeling  in  sections. 

§  2.  Movements  in  files  by  the  centre.  ' 

§  3.  Movements  from  the  flanks. 

§  4.  Countermarching. 

$  5.  Movements  in  sections  of  three. 

§  6.  Movements  in  sections  of  three  from  half  pla- 
toonjs. 


tl 


.  n. .  i'iiiy' 


M 


\ 


./" 


IV 


CHAP.  III. 


COSTEKTS. 


jifs 


^  7.  Sections  of  five,  and  movements  by  heads  of 
sections,  in  open  order  to  the  rear. 

§  8.  Movements  in  echellons  to  the  front  in  ranks 
of  sections. ...rule  for  determining  this  move- 
ment accurately...  advancingbyechellonsfrom 
the  centre,  and  by  heads  of  sections....retiring       i 
in  tlic  same  order. 

§  9.  Augmenting  and  diminishing  front.... man- 
ner  of  executing  it.... first  uie  of  the  indispen- 
sible  oblique,  or  line  of  science. ...rules  for 
augpmenting  and  reducing  front. 

CHAP.  IV.  The  Fire  of  Rifle  Corps, '  .    .     37 

§  1.  How  their  discipline  is  rendered  effective, 
'''  introductory  to  the  use  of  the  rifle. 

'      §  2.  Manual  exercise  of  the  riflemen....the  firing 
motions  to  be  minutely  practised....none  omit- 
ted nor  slurred  over. 
•  $  3.  Of  firing  on  the  spot. 

§  4.  Another  method. 


■!!■• 


-V> 


I    \ 


CHAP.  V.  Formation  of  the  Company, 

"         $  1 .  Corresponding   with  the  infantry  in   every 
particular. 
%  2.  The  pivot. ...its use  in  wheeling. 

;•'  ••  $  3.  Duties  of  light  infantry... .how  to  proceed  in 
particular  circumstances. ...retreating  across 
a  plain.. ..how  they  manosuvre. 
$  4.  Offensive  evolutions... .coup  de  main....advan- 
ced  parties.. ..occupy  defiles....surpri8es..  .bar- 
rass  convoys....coverforagers...  occupy  bridges 
....ambuscade8....coveringmana:u>Tes  in  action. 

CHAP.  VI.  Formation  of  the  Regiment, 

§  1.  Of  what  number  it  should  consist.,  .how  offi- 
cers are  posted,  in  close  and  open  order. 
5  2  Of  advancing,  .ind  firing  advancing  ...signals 

by  tliu  whistle. 
§  J.  Fonuatlon  of  tlic  chain... .liow executed. 
s  4.  Skirniishinjj. 

$  J.  Tirailleurs.  i     .     .- 

§  6.  Retreating.  w       ., 

4  7.  Duties  in  engagements.    "      -  "'    '' 
^  8.  Crossing    rivers.,.. Phites    illustrating  .sucli 
movements. 


47 


'  ^  >"^  * 


u 


'  T 


..•t 


CONTEKTB.  iV 

CHAP.  VII.  Duties  of  Light  Troops  on  actual  service,        75 

§  1.  Maxim  of  Lafayette,  that  aa  efiective  tyitem  ^ 

of  defence  must  be  oSenuve. 
$  2.  Conduct  on  a  coast'  '.'  " 

§  3.  Manner  of  retreat  from  a  superior  force. 
§  4.  Duties  of  advanced  guards  and  outposts. 
§5.  Escorting  a  convoy. 
§  6.  Attack  of  a  convoy.        , 

CHAP.VIII.Ofthe  Rifle,  and  Rifle  Equipments,    .    .        95 

§  1.  Properties  of  the  riflp. 

§  2.  Of  loading  the  rifle. 

§  3.  Of  cleaning  the  rifle. 

^4.  Of  the  lock. 

§  5.  Of  Gunpowder. 

§  6.  Of  the  patch. 

§  7.  To  preserve  the  rifle  from  the  wcatlicr. 

^  8.  Dress  and  equipments  of  riflemen. 

^  9.  Of  evolutionary  bugle  signal. 

^  IQ.  Music  for  the  signals 103 

§  11.  Musical  signals  by  the  whistle  for  out  posts 

at  night, lOS 


THE  PLATES. 


Some  mistakes  in  numbering  the  plates  having  taken  place,  owing  tu 
their  being  in  the  hands  of  the  engi-aver  while  the  first  edition  was  prin- 
ting, the  following  explanation  is  given  to  prevent  errors ;  and  it  has 
been  deemed  proper,  for  unifurmity  sake,  to  let  this  edition  preserve 
the  text  in  the  same  form. 

The  four  first  plates  in  order,  arc  illustrations  by  human  figure;,  anJ 
are  numbered,  No.  1,  5,  6, 4. 

No.  1.  is  an  illustration  of  the  movements  from  both  flanks  cS  a  ph- 
toon,  by  an  outward  facing  and  wheclin^j  to  the  front,  and  tlu;  re/uytiiw 
tion  of  the  platoon  by  the  new  ubll([Uv;  movement. 

No.  5,  originally  intended  for  No.  2,  and  which  is  arranged  iu  that  or- 
der, presents  the  advat\cc  of  the  right  half-platoon,  a  given  number  ot' 
paces,  and  the  quarter  platoon  again  advanced  and  extended,  lor  skir- 
mishing en  tirailleur. 

No.  6,  intended  tor  plate  5,  exhibits  four  ditVei'ent  dispositions  of  firing 
in  retreat,  as  described  on  the  plate. 

No.  4,  is  the  advance  from  the  centre  of  half  companies. ...and  the  final 
restoration  of  tli«;  platoon  by  oblique  movement. 


:i. 


:i  i 


yl  C0KTEKT8. 

The  next  four  plates  are  Nos.  1,  2. 3.  4,  and  wpUin  the  movement,  of 
riflemen  in  different  modes.    These  pUtes  are  from  the  American  Mi- 

litary  Library.  _,,...       _ . 

The  remaining  four  plates  are  also  from  the  American  Military  Li- 

brary,  and  are  numbered  in  the  following  order : 
No  X.  Three  illustrations  of  movements  in  action. 
No.  XI.  Two  movements,  one  in  an  open  country,  the  other  in  a  close 

country. 
No.  XII.  Intercepting  a  fleet  of  boats  on  a  river. 

No.  XIIL  crossing  rivers. 


nj  ■■ 


■i  I,;   n  f.j  -i  • 


J    \<-  '*jv,'"ij  .'J  tnm 


■f;-^:- 


.»:   t*t;i  v-ii*i  ;;>'i 


A  HMtB  BOOK  FOR  BIFLEMEJ^. 


'L   'tij'-   .  I..'.  K    ■-■•is:    n 


M».  ♦.•••c>  • 


CHAP.  I. 


•."■»,ji     if<  1^  .1 , 


S  1.  OF  DISCIPLINE. 


1  HE  discipline  of  armies,  il  must  never  be  forgotten^  is 
intended  to  produce  an  unity  of  force.. ..a  consentaneous  impulse 
of  all  their  parts.. ..to  bring  into  action^  with  the  greatest  effect, 
and  in  a  suitable  manner,  every  description  of  troops  which 
compose  an  army,  according  to  the  received  principles  of  tac* 
tics,  and  to  the  design  of  the  commander  in  special  cases.  This 
is  the  sole  purpose  of  discipline,  and  the  better  any  system  of 
discipline  is  adapted  to  produce  these  effects,  the  more  perfect 

it  is.  ...'..,    ."', "..„.. :   . 

Whoever  undertakes  the  military  profession,  whether  as  a 
practical  soldier  or  as  a  teacher,  will  do  well  to  consider... ^r«r, 
what  is  to  be  accomplished  by  military  means.... Mcond/y,  what 
are  the  means  by  which  military  power  is  rendered  successful 
....and  thirdly,  whether  he  who  undertakes,  comprehends  the 
duties  which  he  is  bound  to  perform  the  moment  he  makes  his 
engagement  with  his  country. 

He  will  perceive  that  all  men  are  nearly  alike  when  educated 
alike,  that  there  is,  indeed,  no  other  difference  between  men  in 
all  nations,  but  what  arises  out  of  superior  and  inferior  health 
and  their  educated  habits ;  and  that,  therefore,  there  must  be 
some  cause,  which  enables  the  men  of  the  same  country,  as  well 
as  the  men  of  different  countries,  to  resist  and  triumph  over 
equal  or  superior  numbers.  That  in  short,  an  army  may  be 
formed  of  9000  men  out  of  a  mob  of  10,000  men ;  the  same  men 
who  composed  the  mob  of  10,000  men  on  the  first  of  January, 
may  on  the  first  of  March,  by  means  of  military  discipline,  be 
rendered  perfectly  competent  to  face  and  defeat  a  mob  of  40,f00, 
without  difficulty  and  almost  without  danger. 

He  will  perceive  in  this  fact,  that  military  discipline  must 
possess  some   principles   or  properties,   very   important    in 

B 


m 


m 


3 


riRST  PBXRCIPLKS   Of 


themselves,  when  they  give  to  one  man  the  power  of  four,  six 
or  ten  men. 

The  great  secret  of  the  failure  of  mobs  consists  in  this,  that 
mobs  act  without  confidence,  from  various  causes ;  the  diversity 
of  opinions  and  judgments  among  a  multitude  of  disconnected 
men,  leaves  them  without  any  common  rule  of  individual  or 
general  action  ;  they  may  all  wish  to  accomplish  the  same  pur* 
pose  ■•••they  may  ail  be  equally  fervent,  resolute  and  disinter- 
ested ;  but  they  cannot  know  the  shades  of  judgment 'or  the 
extent  of  the  discretion  of  each  other.. ..one  man  may  conceive  a 
plan,  and  another  a  different  plan,  either  of  which  properly 
executed  might  be  proper,  but  there  are  no  means  by  which 
others  can  be  brought  to  adopt  and  execute  their  conceptions, 
nor  to  direct  them  to  one  object ;  and  there  may  be  a  thousand 
plans  among  ten  thousand  people  ;  and  the  authors  of  a  l)ad  plan 
may  have  more  influence  than  the  authors  of  a  good  plan....and 
thus  mobs  always  fail,  if  resisted  by  a  body  actuated  and  directed 
by  one  purpose  and  to  one  object,  in  which  opinion  is  surren* 
dered  in  order  to  produce  continued  action,  and  that  the  whole 
concur  in  one  common  design  and  manner  of  action. 

Thus  the  great  secret  of  military  discipline  consists  in  cor- 
recting and  providing  means  to  remedy  the  causes  of  fiulure  in 
mobs.  It  commences  ostensibly  with  teaching  men  how  to 
fi;a//t:....but  at  the  same  time  it  teaches  them  hoto  to  obey.  The 
soldier  learns  to  walk  so  that  the  whole  of  an  aitny  may  walk  in 
a  given  time  an  equal  number  of  paces.. ..and  these  paces  of 
equal  length  The  soldier  learns  to  obey,  because  unity  of 
action  towards  a  single  end,  is  necessary  to  remedy  the  weak- 
ness which  is  found  in  a  mob. ...and  an  army  without  discipline, 
without  subordination,  without  officers  competent  to  lead  them, 
and  to  lead  them  properly,  is  no  better  thun  a  mob. 

The  whole  of  military  discipline  then  consists  in  producing 
on  a  body  of  men  an  uniform  habit  of  acting  and  thinking ;  or 
executing  movements  in  any  manner,  time,  and  place,  as  they 
may  be  commanded  to  do.  Unless  this  habit  of  motion  and 
obedience  be  acquired,  there  is  no  discipline  ;  and  that  discipline 
which  renders  these  objects  most  certain,  simple,  and  effective, 
isthebest.  '-  ..,.,:, 

These  principles  are  universal... .they  apply  to  every  part  of 
an  army.. ..and  although  there  are  various  kinds  of  troops,  anel 


BITLK   UISCmilTE. 


'6 


each  kind  has  something  peculiar  lo  its  own  particular  kind ; 
the  principles  of  obedience,  and  the  exact  and  uniform  execa> 
tion  of  movements,  are  common  to  the  whole  of  an  NPmy. 

Every  species  of  troops  should  first  acquire  the  in&ntrj  dis- 
cipline of  marching,  evolution,  and  exercise.  They  should  ac- 
quire the  equal  pace  of  24  inches,  as  the  uniform  extent  of 
their  step  in  marching,  and  be  able  to  keep  that  pace  a  whole 
day  i  they  should  know  the  method  in  which  infantry  move 
and  mai;ceuvre  ;  and  they  are  then  able  to  join  a  rifle  corps,  a 
corps  of  artillery  or  cavalry  ;  for  as  the  infantry  compose  the 
mun  body  of  every  army,  and  as  riflemeny  ortiUery^  and  cavalry^ 
are  only  auxiliaries  of  'the  Hne  t^  battle^  those  who  understand 
infimtry  movements,  will  the  better  understand  their  own  duties; 
which  they  cannot  so  well  understand,  unless  they  first  learn 
infantry  duties. 

This  Hand  Book  being  for  rifiemen  only,  it  is  proper  to  state 
that  they  ought  first  to  learn  the  duties  of  the  infiintry  drill, 
and  their  immediate  drill  then  becomes  easy  to  them.     >  - .»' 


.'-Wnorj--, 


§  i.  ORIGIN  OF  RIFLE  CORPS. 


y- 


r,.>mv 


of 
knil 


Rifle  corps,  called  al»o  SAarfi-ahootera  and  Tirailleurai  some- 
times Chaaaeura  a  fiitdf  and  Yagera^  and  also  VoUiguera  and 
Eclaireura,  according  to  the  service  uix>n  which  they  are 
employed ;  owe  their  rise  and  importance  to  the  American 
revolution.  They  were  the  creation  of  accidents,  but  of  acci- 
dents proceeding  from  natural  circumstances,  and  became 
important  from  actual  experiment,  before  they  were  adopted 
into  military  establishments. 

In  the  war  of  the  American  revolution,  the  use  of  riflemen 
was  demonstrated,  and  soon  improved  upon  by  those  European 
officers,  who  had,  by  being  alKes  or  enemies  of  America  in  the 
contest,  witnessed  the  effect  of  the  desultory  and  direct  fire 
with  smooth  barrels  at  Bunker  Hill,  with  rifle  barrels  at  Sara- 
toga, and  in  all  the  subsequent  actions  of  the  revolutionary  war. 

The  habits  of  life  of  the  American  farmer,  and  the  early 
necessity  of  self  defence  against  the  rude  men  of  the  wilderness 
and  the  beasts  of  the  forest ;  gave  the  rifle  gun  or  grooved 
carabine  a  preference  over  the  plain  fusil  or  gun ;  it  was  found 
more  certain  in  its  execution  than  the  smooth  bore  of  the  ibwl- 


-„,Jf 


FIRST  PBIHCIPLES  OV 


\ 


ing  piece  and  firelock,  by  those  who  were  always  armed.  The 
habits  which  s^ew  out  of  the  state  of  early  settlement,  in  a 
country  j'^t  uncultured  and  uncivilized,  made  every  man  a  good 
ahef'  The  dangers  from  the  Indians  and  the  wild  beasts  of  the 
desert,  were  then  the  first  -incentives  to  expertness,  and  the 
causes  of  skill  in  the  use  of  the  rifle.  The  pursuit  of  the  deer 
and  other  animals,  and  all  the  various  birds  which  furnish  what 
is  understood  by  the  comprehensive  term  tfiortj  administered 
to  the  habits  which  were  necessary  to  defence,  and  each  to  the 
other.  No  game  laws,  nor  religious  jealousies,  retarded  or 
checked  the  alacrity  of  the  American  farmer.  The  youth,  at 
the  moment  he  was  able  to  pull  a  trigger,  was  educated  to  the 
sport  of  the  field,  and  the  expertness  of  the  American  farmer 
became  proverbial,  as  the  use  of  the  rifie  was  an  indispensible 
qualification  ti.  every  man  who  had  occasion  to  defend  himself, 
or  taste  for  the  sports  of  the  field  and  the  forest. 

In  this  situation  of  the  country  the  American  revolution  com- 
menced. A  foreign  veteran  army,  led  on  by  generals  schooled 
in  the  tactics  of  Prussia,  appeared  amongst  a  people  strangers  to 
the  concert  of  battalions  or  brigades ;  to  whom  the  tactics  and 
manceuvres  of  the  scientific  soldier,  and  the  arts  of  the  engineer* 
were  alike  unknown.  But  there  was  not  a  man  in  the  country 
who  could  not  hit  a  space  of  a  foot  diameter,  at  one  hundred  and 
fifty  yards,  with  a  single  ball.  Tlie  great  mass  of  the  settlers 
remote  from  cities  could  shoot  a  squirrel,  and  shoot  it  in  the 
head  from  choice,  and  with  confidence  and  certainty. 

From  such  materials,  ready  prepared,  the  sagacity  of  the  first 
founders  of  American  independence,  formed  a  force  ne»v  in  its 
character,  and  more  fatal  in  its  tactics  to  the  armies  of  Britain, 
than  the  Hungarian  hussars  had  been  to  the  opponents  of  Aus- 
tria, the  Prussian  artillery  to  the  enemies  of  Frederic,  or  the 
French  echellons  to  the  coalesced  powers  of  Europe.  The  first 
operations  of  the  new  species  of  light  corps,  were  conducted 
and  regulated  by  the  mode  of  Indian  warfare,  by  the  judgment 
of  the  citizens  wuo  associated  together,  and  agreed  to  act  on 
particular  points  of  the  British  lines,  on  their  columns  of  march, 
and  on  tlieir  outposts  and  foraging  parties,  and  in  such  numbers 
as  accident  brought  together. 

''  The  momentary  experience  of  the  Massachusetts  yeomanry 
in  their  pursuit  of  the  British  corps  at  Lexington  and  Conco.«'d 
in  April  177(1,  and  the  effect  of  their  spirit  and  perseverance  in 


K 


KIFLV   DISCIPLINE. 


& 


on 


uy 

>rd 

in 


pursuing  and  routin{»a  moie  numerous  body  of  disciplined  sol* 
dierS)  inspired  an  auspicious  confidence  in  this  new  mode  of 
warfare;  subsequent  events  confirmed  these  early  preposses- 
sions, and  the  application  of  this  species  of  action  to  oiierations 
of  the  line,  at  the  battid  of  Bunker  Hill,  where  the  British  suf- 
fiired  in  the  loss  of  officers  and  men  to  an  extent  unexampled, 
inspired  the  British  during  the  remainder  of  the  war,  with  such 
constant  apprehension,  that  the  officers  were  thenceforth  clad  and 
accoutred  like  the  rank  and  file,  to  evade,  if  possible,  the  dextrous 
fatality  of  the  expert  sharp-shooters.  The  confidence  of  the 
Americans  was  encreased  in  proportion  to  their  success....and 
soon  after  the  campaign  which  was  fatal  to  Burgoyne,  corps  of 
riflemen  assumed  a  more  consistent  organization ;  they  were 
formed  into  companies,  embodied  into  regiments,  and  placed 
under  skilful  and  intrepid  officers..>^and  in  the  course  of  the 
war  were  eminently  distinguished  by  their  gallantry  under  a 
Morgan,  a  Mifflin,  a  Steele,  and  other  brave  officers. 

The  British  endeavored  to  collect  bodies  of  tories  and  refu- 
gees, t»  form  similar  corps  to  counteract  this  species  of  force » 
and  the  auxiliaries  from  Hesse  and  other  parts  of  Germany, 
brought  some  who  were  employed  under  the  denomination  of 
Yagers  or  hunters^  in  an  analogous  warfare. 

The  French  who  had  been  engaged  in  the  wars  of  the  revolu- 
ti«n,  had  seen  the  effects  produced  by  these  light  troops  ;  they 
had  not  forgotten  them ;  and  on  the  first  movements  of  the 
French  revolution,  endangered  by  the  defection  of  so  many 
military  men  of  the  old  school,  they  saw  the  necessity  of  a  new 
organization  for  raw  troops;   experience  pointed  out  to  the 
French  the  fitness  and  utility  of  these  detached  corps,  who  were 
called  tirailleura  {  a  term  significant  of  one  who  fires  at  random, 
or  at  his  own  discretion,  and  without  a  special  command ;  in 
a  desultory  manner,  but  with  deliberation.     To  give  them  the 
consistency  of  infantry  they  were  disciplined  as  infantry  of  the 
line,  or  were  selected  from  the  most  expert  of  the  whole  army ; 
various  corps  were  embodied  under  the  denomination  of  Chas' 
aeura  d  /tied)  or  foot  hunters  ;  Voltigeurs  or  Vaulters,  from  the 
agility  acquired  in  a  particular  branch  of  exercise  on  service.   < 
The  Austrian  and  Prussian,  and  other  German  armies,  have 
adopted  the  system  of  rifle  corps  ;  and  veiy  soon  after  the  Bri- 
tish  engaged  in  the  war  on  the  European  continent  against 
France,  they  found  the  necessity  of  adopting  them  likewise. 


;n^ 


6 


YIBST  PUINC1PI.BS   Of 


(/ 


r 


The  celebrated  general  Lloyd,  during  his  services  in  tlie 
Austrian  army,  particularly  in  the  wars  in  Saxony,  Bohemia,  and 
Silesia,  against  Prussia ;  very  sagaciously  perceived  the  defects 
of  the  prevailing  military  dispositions,  and  although  he  did  not 
immediately  organize  any  corps  upon  the  principles  which  he 
recommended,  he  very  plainly  points  out  those  services,  for 
which  some  troops  were  required,  to  which  rifltTnen  have  been 
since  applied  with  all  the  success  which  his  judgment  anticipated. 
General  Lloyd  frequently,  in  the  progress  of  his  work  called 
Military  Reveries,  points  out  the  uses  of  this  species  of  light 
troops,  particularly  in  these  terms : 

"  Armies,*'  he  says,  ^  are  now  usually  formed  in  two  or  three 
*'  lines  ;  between  their  lines  and  the  enemy,  light  /roo/t«,  often 
"  amounting  to  twenty  thousand,  form  a  chain  of  observation,  to 
"  prevent  the  enemy  from  attacking  unexpectedly.  Frequently 
"  they  are  sent  out  on  detachments,  to  cover  or  cut  off  convoys, 
"  while  the  main  army  is  acting  in  a  certain  line  of  operation. 
"  These  light  troops  are  considered  as  mere  scouts,  which 
"  seldom  take  a  part  in  the  battle.  When  you  advance,  or 
«  when  the  enemy  advances,  these  light  troops  retire  by  files 
"  to  the  right  and  left,  and  are  no  more  heard  of  till  the  action 
*'  terminates.  Whij  they  do  not  farm  on  the  enemy*9  Jianka, 
**  and  create  a  diversion  there^  haa  been  qften  a  matter  of 
"  aur/irise  to  judicious  military  characters.  Small  bodies  of 
"  light  troo/is  stationed  betiveen  hedgtsy  near  the  high  roads, 
''  and  behind  clumfis  of  trees,  or  in  loooda,  would  observe  and 
'*  harrass  the  enemy  and  annoy  his  columns,  and  aid  a  decisive 
"  attack  by  the  army,  more  effectually  than  ten  or  fifteen  thou- 
"  sand  men  acting  in  a  straggling  chain  of  observation.  A 
'<  regular  chain  is  easily  observed  by  the  enemy  who  manoeu* 
"  vres  under  cover  of  it,  whereas  a  broken  chain  of  detached 
"  parties  unites  or  disperses  in  an  instant,  becomes  as  it  were 
"  invisible,  and  gives  immediate  infvrmation  of  the  minutest 
"  movement  made  by  the  enemy."  This  little  extract  gives  a 
perspicuous  view  of  the  duties  of  riflemen .  •     >  ^r  >i:^'  t  ;■'  a  >  i .  ' 

Baron  Gross,  an  able  officer,  who  has  published  an  useful 
tract  on  the  duties  of  an  officer  in  the  field,  thus  illustrates  the 
utility  of  the  American  discovery  in  the  art  of  war,  and  shews 
the  effects  which  were  realized  by  the  French  through  this 
means.  -  v  »{*!•  »*t  r-vrtji^aaii?:. 

•    ■    .  ■      !•>.  I-.   •.'•1,' :■■:'.<!;  •    '^  biiitf*  ^JitS  r'>'"*i''  * 


unut  msciPLiKE. 


"  The  French  since  the  revolution,  have  so  8uccessfull3r  in- 
'<  troduced  a  new  militarx  system,  tliat  it  becomes  impossible  to 
"  oppose  them  effectually,  by  any  other  mode  than  adopting 
"  one  founded  <  imilar  principles.  They  send  a  number  of 
«  riflemtn  in  j  .'of  their  Hne  to  annoy  their  adversary,  and 
"  conceal  behind  them  the  different  movementa  qf  their  columns. 
^'  Nothing  can  be  effected  against  this  disposition  but  by  oppo- 
"  sing  light  tixwps  of  a  similar  description." 

It  is  here  obvious,  that  the  means  recommended  by  Lloyd 
upon  theory,  and  adopted  from  the  American  practice,  have 
been  momentous. 

An  English  writer,  who  blends  more  asperity  than  becomes 
an  officer,  in  a  didactic  work,  gives  very  strong  evidence  of 
the  truth  whicli  he  reluctantly  admits  in  the  successes  of  the 
French  rifle  corps,  and  the  causes  which  gave  rise  to  them ;  in 
th^  following  remarks : 

"  The  art  of  war  during  tiie  French  revolution  hte  under- 
"  gone  a  considerable  change.  Pitched  battles  and  regular  en^ 
"  g&gements  are  now  in  a  great  measure  avoided,  and  a  con- 
"  stant  series  of  unremitting  operations  are  directed  against  the 
"  flanks  and  rear  of  an  enemy,  to  retard  or  prevent  his  progress 
"  in  front.  To  light  movements  the  French  are  indebted  for 
"  much  of  their  success  in  the  war ;  and  they  adopted  them 
"  more  from  necessity  than  choice.  Their  numberless  con* 
**  scripts,  undisciplined,  marched  raw  to  the  armies,  were 
"  thrown  in  swarms  on  the  flanks  of  the  Austrian  columns  to 
^  act  irregularly,  and  their  success  answered  the  expectation. 

"  The  Austrian  columns,  unaccustomed  to  this  novel  spe- 
'*  cies  of  attack  when  they  looked  for  a  regular  battle,  fell  into 
"  confusion  and  retreated  before  an  undisciplined  rabble.  Such 
'<  is  the  origin  of  the  war  of  posts  which  the  French  found  it 
*'  convenient  to  carry  on,  till  tactical  habits  rendered  their 
<<  troops  capable  of  acting  in  the  line.  Nations  adopt  from 
<*  each  other  what  sad  experience  proves  to  be  an  obvious  ad- 
^  ventage  in  carrying  on  war.  The  action  of  rifle  corps  and 
^  light  troops  is  now  much  depended  on,  and  not  unfrequently 
«  decides  the  contest.  The  lactics  of  light  troops  have  now 
"  necessarily  btcome  an  important  branch  of  general  discip- 
'♦  line." 

This  short  sketch  of  the  origin  and  character  of  rifle  corps  waii 
a  necessary  preface  to  their  mode  of  discipline  and  exercise. 


>r- 


8 


FIHST  PRINCIPLES  OF 


)  ( 


After  their  introduction  into  the  armies  of  Europe,  they  were 
first  formed  into  companies,  and  subsequently  into  regiments, 
in  the  campaigns  of  Switzerland  and  Itidy,  against  the  Austrians 
and  Russians,  and  subsequently  in  the  battles  which  deter- 
mined the  war  against  Austria,  Russia  and  Prussia-  The  French 
corps  susceptible  of  being  formed  as  riflemen,  amounted  to 
forty  thousand  men  in  the  grand  army,  and  greatly  contributed 
to  the  victory  in  tlie  memorable  battle  of  Jena.  They  were 
composed  of  men  selected  from  the  line,  and  denominated 
cor^«  rf'«?/»Ve,  or  select  troops.  .■J<p;j)>  i>aB.  .yi 

European  nations  being  our  imitators  in  this  branch  of  military 
force,  renders  it  necessary  in  America  to  pay  the  more  atten- 
tion thereto,  because  should  a  war  occur  on  our  shores,  we  shall 
be  opposed  by  the  weapons  which  we  have  ourselves  invented. 
Upon  rifle  corf  18,  and  horse  or  fiying  artillery^  artillery  iegire, 
we  shall  have  to  rely  much  in  conducting  war,  because  these 
are  the  means  best  suited  to  the  nature  of  our  country.    '■'  " 

The  service  of  rifle  corps  is  properly  a  branch  of  the  service 
of  light  troofia,  generally  so  called,  as  well  as  the  cbaaaeura  of 
the  French,  and  what  is  called  light  infantry.  In  the  old  esta- 
blishments of  Europe,  prior  to  the  American  revolution,  light 
infantry  consisted  of  a  single  flank  company  attached  to  each 
regiment.  The  French  had  embodied  before  the  revolution  a 
few  corps  wholly  of  that  description.  They  now  have  grenadier 
riflemen  as  well  as  battalion  ;  and  they  select  men  of  particular 
expertness  and  form  them  into  distinct  companies  of  the  same 
half  brigade;  such  as  «7tf/»i»ier*,  vaMfttr*,  &c.  .il'w'v  v^ni  . 

During  the  American  revolution,  some  of  the  roost  active 
British  officers  had  suggested  the  employment  of  the  flank 
corps  of  the  regiments  in  a  collective  manner.  Among  these 
were  general  Howe,  general  Williamson,  and  general  Gray, 
memorable  for  their  midnight  expeditions.  Since  the  French 
revolution,  the  European  nations  generally  have  pursued  the 
system,  and  whole  regiments  and  divisions  of  armies  have  lieen 
formed  oi  infant er it  Icg^rc,  or  light  infantry,  chasseurs  ^  filed, 
tirailleurs  or  sharp  shooters,  or  rifle  corps,  all  of  which  bear 
some  analogy  to  each  other. 


..Vfii 


U..'< 


'■iiiiv"*,-)  ..<i- 


'  < .' 


J-i      .'     •  iJ.    :rT      ' 


t,  .•• 


.<  -,i 


-  .»J 


RIVXE  DISCIPLINE. 


fi 


«,  they  were 
o  regiments, 
he  Austrians 
which  deter- 
The  French 
amounted  to 
Y  contributed 
They  were 
denominated 

ch  of  military 
i  more  atten- 
ires,  we  shall 
Ives  invented. 
tiUery  ieghe^ 
because  these 
ntry. 

)f  the  service 

:  cAtuseura  of 

the  old  esta- 

olutior,  light 

ched  to  each 

;  revolution  a 

ave  grenadier 

of  particular 

of  the  same 

e  most  active 
of  the  flank 
mong  these 
|eneral  Gray, 

the  French 
pursued  the 

s  have  l)een 
eura  d  fiied^ 

which  bear 

■•■•f .J  >■■''' 

t 

■  ll 
^  -  ii! 

1    ■.    *  . 


CHAP.  n. 


ON  THE  DRILL  OF  RIFLEMEN. 

$  1 .  I  HE  drill  of  the  rifle  company  should  be  conducted 
in  the  same  manner  as  the  drill  of  the  infantry.  They  should 
be  capable  of  forming  and  displaying  the  column,  advancing 
and  retreating  in  line.. ..in  open  and  in  close  order ;  in  single 
and  in  double  files ;  and  the  whole  detail  of  the  battalion  evo- 
lutions.  The  generality  of  officers  as  well  as  men,  do  not  form 
an  adequate  idea  of  the  importance  to  be  derived  from  a  previous 
discipline  of  riflemen  in  the  common  evolutions  of  the  infantry  ; 
and  although  as  marksmen,  the  American  riflemen  surpass  all 
others ;  in  what  regards  diacifiline  and  the  strength  and  con- 
fidence arising  from  discipline,  they  are  inferior  to  the  riflemen 
of  other  nations,  and  for  this  reason,  that  in  European  armies 
the  riflemen  are  selected  out  of  infantry  corps  already  disciplined, 
and  it  is  by  the  skill  which  they  display  in  the  target  practice 
as  infantry,  that  they  are  chosen  for  the  tirailleura  or  riflemen ; 
so  that  their  appointment  to  rifle  corps  takes  place  only  after 
they  have  had  an  infantry  discipline. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  American  riflemen  are  not  made 
acquainted  with  infantry  movements.... very  little  care  has  been 
bestowed  on  any  part  of  the  rifle  discipline  but  what  relates  to 
the  mere  firing,  while  the  importance  of  discipline  is  never 
made  known,  and  therefore  remains  unknown,  and  they  have 
consequently  no  ideas  of  the  eflect  of  discipline,  and  are  led  to 
believe  that  all  their  military  eflect  is  in  distinct  military  action, 
and  not  at  all  dependent  on  action  combined. 

The  drill  cannot  be  better  introduced  than  by  the  coun* 
sels  of  an  enemy,  by  an  officer  who  gained  his  experience  in 
arms  against  the  United  States.  It  is  from  the  second  chapter 
of  the  treatise  on  the  duties  of  light  troops,  by  colonel  Van 
Ehwald,  who  commanded  a  company  of  Hessian  Yagers  in  the 
war  of  our  revolution-    "  Light  corps,"  says  colonel  Ehwald, 


I. 


ft 


f! 


10 


FIRST  PSINCIPLBS  OV 


]     I 


*  I  ! 


'Li 


"  are  in  general  negligently  drilled,  and  are  supposed  not  to 
require  any  knowledge  of  manoeuvres ;  their  movements 
therefore  are  inconsistent  and  incorrect ;  nay,  I  have  seen 
several  vrhich  were  hardly  able  to  face  at  the  command  to  the 
right  about,  or  to  march  in  sections. 

"  The  principal  cause  of  this  evil  is,  that  these  corps  are 
frequently  raised  in  a  hurry,  and  that  in  inatructing  them  an  im- 
profier  method  i»  fiuraued ;  for  the  instruction,  as  in  so  many 
other  branches  of  military  affairs,  begina  vthere  it  ahould  end. 
The  whole  attention  is  turned  to  a  uaeleaa  manual  exerdaey 
and  to  trifiea  of  the  aame  kind,  while  w^hat  is  truly  useful  to 
such  a  corps  is  left  untaught.  The  officers  commit  the  labor 
of  drills  to  non<commissioned  officers  who  have  not  opportu- 
nities to  study  or  know  what  is  proper,  they  teach  them  a  few 
mechanical  tricks,  and  when  the  inspector  comes,  he  finds 
them  clean  dressed,  and  that  they  handle  their  arms  firettily  s 
upon  the  credit  of  this,  and  to  save  himself  the  trouble  of  a 
minute  inspection,  and  often  to  oblige  the  commanding  officer, 
he  passes  them  in  muster....and  it  is  not  until  they  have  joined 
the  army  and  their  services  are  called  for,  that  it  is  found  they 
ha,ve  every  thing  tu  learn. 

«  There  are  men  who  pretend  to  be  acquainted  with  military 
matters,  and  who  while  they  might  be  excused  for  their  igno- 
rance, if  they  did  not  make  the  pretensions,  are  pernicious 
from  the  necessity  they  are  under  of  condemning  every  thing 
as  useless  pedantry  which  they  do  not  understand.  Others, 
equally  ignorant,  take  their  words  for  it,  and  as  men  of  this  kind 
flatter  their  aufieriora,  which  men  of  real  merit  will  not  bend  to 
do,  military  knowledge  is  destroyed  before  it  is  begun.  Men 
of  this  class  say,  that  in  the  presence  of  an  enemy,  all  these 
school  rules  drop  to  the  ground;  as  every  thing  must  be  carried 
by  the  point  of  the  bayonet....and  why  should  men  be  tormented 
with  drilUJor  nothing? 

"  Thus  it  is,  that  many  are  led  to  believe  that  drill  and  ex* 
ercise  are  not  necessary  for  riflemen,  because  they  are  not 
required  to  fight  battles  in  close  order ;  but  supposing  that  a 
light  corps,  of  which  I  have  seen  some  examples  in  the 
American  war,  should  have  the  good  fortune  to  escape  the 
bad  consequences  of  a  want  of  discipline,  through  a  similar 
want  on  the  other  side,  would  it  not  be  more  satisfactory  to  the 


« 


ll<u 


BITLB  DISCIPLIinS. 


H 


commander,  and  better  deserve  the  approbation  of  men  of 
sense,  if  he  were  to  discipline  his  corps  so  as  to  be  calculated 
for  all  sorts  of  duties ;  besides  it  impresses  even  an  enemy 
with  respect,  when  he  sees  a  corps  of  riflemen  as  well  discip* 
lined  as  a  corps  of  the  line.  The  soldier  himself  feels  a  certain 
confidence  and  pride  from  the  consciousness  of  his  skill,  and  b 
prepared  for  every  thing. 

"  As  soon  as  the  recruit  can  face  to  the  right  and  lefl  cor- 
rectly, let  him  march  and  wheel  a  few  days  in  ranks,  and 
without  arms,  after  which  put  arms  in  his  hands,  teach  him 
the  firing  motions,  and  how  to  load  and  fire  correctly  and 
skilfully  ;  bring  him  to  the  target  and  give  him  practice  there ; 
divide  the  company  into  platoons,  produce  emulation  among 
them,  and  in  six  weeks,  by  drilling  twice  a  day,  two  or  three 
hours  at  a  time,  the  officers  and  men  will  be  fit  for  duty.  When 
the  men  have  learned  a  short  manual,  devote  the  morning 
drills  to  firing  at  the  target,  and  the  afternoon  to  exercise  and 
manoeuvres." 

It  is  unnecessary  to  quote  more  from  this  valuable  work, 
which  has  been  translated  from  the  German  into  English. 
Thus  much  will  serve  as  a  preface  to  the  rifle  drills. 


ex* 

not 

latR 

Ithe 
I  the 
lilar 
the 


§  2.  The  first  drill  should  be  conducted  as  in  the  infantry} 
forming,  ranking  and  sizing  ;  the  tallest  men  on  the  right  and 
left  of  the  rank,  and  diminishing  to  the  centre,  and  so  of  each 
rank  ;  and  should  be  conducted  in  the  following  manner : 

The  bugle  or  drum  having  brought  the  men  to  parade  at  the 
appointed  hour,  and  the  officer  who  has  charge  of  the  drill,  with 
two  or  three  non>commissioned  officers,  one  of  the  latter  is 
posted  on  the  right,  and  the  officer  gives  the  word, 

Fall  in,  '  »       .    ' 

The  recruits  take  their  places  successively  on  the  left  side  of 
the  non-commissioned  officer,  in  an  easy  and  unconstrained 
position  ;  the  feet  neither  too  close  nor  too  distant,  toes  turned 
out ;  the  face  to  the  front,  and  eyes  so  directed  as  to  see  about 
18  or  20  yard>  on  the  ground  in  front ;  the  hands  suspended 
by  the  side  without  pressure,  so  that  the  middle  finger  may  be 
placed  opposite  the  seams  of  the  pantaloons ;  and  the  breast 
thrown  so  easily  forward  as  to  leave  respiration  perfectly  free. 


.>  ' 


in 


FIRST  PBINCIPUes   OF 


I  !■( 


'•I 


The  non-commissioned  officers  should  at  first  aid  the  men  in 
sizing,  so  that  the  rip^ht  man  shall  be  the  tallest,  and  that  they 
shall  descend  regularly  to  the  left.. ..as  soon  as  the  whole  are 
formed  in  this  disposition,  the  officer  of  the  drill  gives  the 
precautionary  wordf 

Attention. 

The  company  for  squad  J  will  take  care  to  tell  off 

IN  DOUBLE  FILES. 

Tell  off. 

The  first  man  tells  ontt  the  second  twof  and  so  on  to  the  left 
....in  the  following  order: 


e    u    o 

>    g    ft 


O       4.1 


i 


O      4)      9 
*•      O     -f 


o    «)    e 

>    S    ^ 


MNMMMMMHttHMNNHHMHHNN 

The  officer  in  charge  of  the  drill  will  then  proceed  to  inform 
them: 

The  comfiany  (filatoon^  or  squad)  are  next  to  form  double 

filet  faced  to  the  right. ...the  front  rank  •will  then  be  faced  to  the 

right  aboutf  and  countermarched  upon  the  left  of  the  rear  rank  ; 

while  the  flea  composing  the  rank  who  have  called  oncy  move  up  to 

the  right  hand  file^  still  facing  to  the  right. 

They  will  be  then  taught  that  every  movement  from  the 
moment  the  rank  is  formed,  until  the  word  halt  is  given,  must 
be  conducted  at  marked  time  ;  and  marking  time  is  explained 
to  be  the  alternate  raising  of  the  feet,  in  musical  time,  which 
will  at  first  be  taught  by  the  sound  of  the  voice. .. .one.. ..^wo.... 
one....^wo....and  that  oil  moving  from  the  line  it  must  be  ac« 
complished  in  even  paces  of  24  inches,  in  the  same  time. 

The  officer  will  then  give  the  words  of  precaution : 

The  files  which  have  named  one,  will  keep  their  ground^  but 
face  to  the  rights  when  they  hear  the  word  right ;  the  even  files^ 
or  those  w/iich  have  named  two,  will  not  move  until  they  hear  the 
ti'ord  wheel. 

Attention,      r      '.■""'    :^  '  ;•"■■''-' '^      ■*-.;    ;'-;;  "■ 

Take  cake  to  form  double  files  by  wheeling  upon 
thk  right....or  odd  files. 

»}Iark  time. 

Bouhlc  filcs....right.... 


u:<x 


:■>!. 


'  » 


ii  '..)* 


BITLB  DISCIPLIirii. 


U 


At  this  word  the  odd  files  face  to  the  right,  and  the  company 
piv  r  :nts  the  following  disposition : 

31212121212121212121 

HSnSNSMSHSMSHSHSnSMS 

On  the  second  vfotd....v>heel.,..the  squad  will  present -the  fol* 
lowing  disposition: 

Whed.      /  *      • 

jl^ta  j{(o  3^  3*^  9*^  9*^  9^  9^  9*^  9*^ 

8m  8m  8m  8m  8>-  9^  9^  9^  9^  9- 

The  even  files  now  forming  the  front  rank,  and  it  being  the 
object  to  bring  them  all  into  one  rank,  the  front  rank  must  be 
counlermarrhed  by  the  following  words : 

.Front  rank„»,right  abovt,*„face. 
Upon  the  left  countermarch„.,mareh. 

They  will  then  move,  and  exhibit  the  following  movement : 

SSS88S33S3SS3 

When  the  whole  have  farmed  on  the  left  of  the  odd  files 
they  will  present  this  disposition,  or  faced  to  the  right,  when 
they  receive  the  word, 

Caver.  '•  • 

3338  33333  33  333333338 

By  this  word  is  intended  that  the  men  in  succession  from  the 
head  of  the  rank,  should  cover  the  space  from  the  first  to  the 
last  man  in  a  direct  line ;  each  man  looking  directly  at  the 
back  of  the  head  of  the  man  before  him.  It  must  be  kept  in 
mind,  that  the  whole  of  this  drill  must  be  performed  at  marked 
time,  and  that  attention  must  be  constantly  paid  to  this,  and 
from  the  time  any  movement  is  begun  until  the  time  it  is 
completed,  the  men  will  be  kept  with  moving  feet. 

The  officer  will  then  give  the  word : 

Front  face.,*.haU, 
flMttMMNMNHNHMMttHHHnHH 


'111 


ill 


r 


i« 


FIRST  FBIircIPLBS  OF 


M 


II  ^M 


I 


The  whole  having  assumed  this  position,  now  look  to  the 
right,  and  dresH  by  the  right  hand  man. 

But  after  a  few  drills,  there  should  be  no  halt,  until  a  conside- 
rable  number  of  marches  or  evolutions  shall  have  been  executed. 


■ih 


§  3.  They  are  next  brought  to  marked  /tme....and  faced  to  the 
rigfit  several  successive  times.. ..then  to  the  left  several  succes- 
sive times.. ..and  then  to  the  right  about,...and  to  the  left  about, 
until  they  have  acquired  the  habit  of  attending  to  the  exact 
word  of  command  without  mistake. 

They  must  be  taught  to  face  to  the  right  by  three  short  steps, 
beginning  with  the  leji  foot  and  ending  with  the  left  foot ;  and 
in  going  to  the  right  or  leJi  about,  it  must  be  done  also  with 
three  ttepa,  always  beginning  with  the  left  foot ;  and  they  must 
next  be  accustomed  daily  for  several  days  to  be  faced  to  any 
side  without  preparation,  and  at  the  word  as  ordered ;  and  as 
often  as  they  mistake,  they  must  be  continued  at  the  alternate 
facings  until  their  attention  is  so  well  6xed  that  they  will  no 
longer  mistake. 

It  must  never  be  lost  sight  of,  that  all  movements  must  be 
at  marked  time  ;  no  turning  upon  a  fixed  foot,  nor  marching  at 
slow  time,  which  is  adapted  only  to  funeral  service. 

After  they  have  been  well  practised  in  the  facings,  they 
must  be  marched  in  »ingl*  fitea,  or  Indian  file  ;  as  this  mode 
of  marching  is  particularly  adapted  to  riflemen ;  the  drills  in 
marching  by  single  files,  mv.st  be  practised  with  great  diligence, 
exactness,  and  perseverance. 

The  officer  will,  before  they  are  marched,  and  dressed  to  the 

front,  instruct  them  as  to  the  meaning  of  the  terms,  such  as 

file  and  depth  of  ranks;  he  will  tell  them  that  a  file  consists  of 

the  number  of  men  in  a  rank  faced  to  the  front.. ..that  if  it  be  a 

single  rank  of  twenty  men  in  front,  it  is  a  rank  of  twenty  files  ; 

and  that  if  there  are  two  ranks  of  twenty  men  in  front,  that 

still  there  are  only  twenty  files  ;  for  a  file  may  consist  of  one, 

two,  three,  or  four  men,  if  there  are  so  many  ranks.     That 

Indian  file  is  a  term  adopted  from  the  usage  of  the  Indians, 

who  move  in  one  rank  only,  and  step  in  each  others'  paces. 

That  when  there  are  two  ranks  they  are  called  double  files, 

when  three  ranks  triple  files  ;  but  in  the  ordinary  duties  ofrifie- 

men,  they  rarely  move  in  any  other  order  than  that  of  tmio  ranks 

or  double  files,  or  in  one  rank  or  single  files. 


N 


HITLE  DMCmiNE. 


15 


So  they  must  be  told  that  they  will  have  to  march  at  the  Indian 
fiacci  when  they  have  to  form  company ;  and  thin  pace  or  half 
trot  must  be  explained. 

$  4.  To  commence  the  exercise  in  marchingt  they  should  be 
first  marched  in  rank  entire  to  the  front ;  faced  to  the  right  about, 
moved  to  the  ground  they  moved  from,  and  brought  to  the  right 
about  ag^in ;  but  the  words  of  command  must  be  given  in  this 
manner.... the  company  being  already  ranked  and  sized  : 

Jltlention. 

The  compahy  will  take  care  to  advance  to  the 

THONT. 

Mark  time, 

One....tv>o....one....two. 

The  officer  here  repeats  the  words  one....tv>o....XYie  men  lifting 
the  left  foot  and  striking  the  ground  at  onCf  and  lifting  the  right 
foot  at  twot  and  so  altemately....but  in  marking  time  in  this 
manner,  they  must  not  move  off  the  ground  they  are  paraded' 
upon,  without  another  word,  that  is  tither..../br%oard.„.w  marcA. 

Take  care  to  advance  in  rank. 
March. 

One.,..two,„.(me....two.... 
Bight  ah(ntt.„ifaee, 
Mark  time.„.dre88, 
Forward„„niarch, 

One....^wo....one....fwo....when  they  have  reached  the  ground 
they  moved  from, 

Mark  time. 

Bight  db(yiUfaee*»JiaU» 


§  5.  The  next  movement  will  be  facing  to  the  right,  and  this 
must  be  practised  until  satisfactorily  executed,  with  precision 
and  correctness. 

Attention* 

The  compant  vnhh  take  cars  to  moti  in  sinoi,b 

FliblS. 


ilMJ 


r- ' 


y 


16 


riRST  FBUVCIPLBS  OF 


I    4 


H 


S  ! 


i( 


H 


I 


i 


II 


JUarktime, 

One.„jfoo,,..one,.,.tvto, 
Right  faee.,..forward. 
They  then  present  this  disposition.... 

Having  marched  in  that  direction  equal  paces  and  in  equal 
tinie>  as  far  as  is  convenient,  they  receive  the  word> 
Bight....wheeL 
And  then  appear  in  the  following  position : 


SS8S8SS33S38S83 

M 

The  squad  is  wheeled  several  times  by  the  right,  and  at 
length  into  its  first  position  and  faced  to  the  front;  and  then  it 
is  faced  to  the  other  flank  and  wheeled  to  the  left  in  the  follow- 
ing form : 

W  Left,»,.face. 

II  Lfjt.,..wh€eL 

M 

The  difference  between  facing  and  loheeUng  is  to  be  explain- 
ed ;  that  facing  always  applies  to  each  individual ;  wheeling 
always  to  more  than  a  single  individual ;  or  that  in  facing  every 
man  turns  on  his  own  centre  ;  in  wheeling  every  man  moves 
in  a  common  centre  with  the  rest  of  the  rank :  that  several 
wheel,  and  several  face,  but  one  only  never  wheels  alone, 
unless  a  rank  is  marched  in  single  files,  when  it  implies  that 
every  file  which  follows,  must  wheel  in  the  same  direction, 
and  at  the  same  point ;  if  the  word  of  command  be  right  face, 
every  man  must  face  to  the  right,  and  it  would  then  be  a  rank 
faced  to  the  right;  but  in  wheeling  to  the  right,  the  direction 
that  the  leading  file  takes,  the  whole  of  the  files  take. 


>■... 


tawLA  DisciPLims* 


17 


999 

d  in  equal 


SS3 
*%•• 
M 
M 
M 
W 

ht,  and  at 
nd  then  it 
the  follow- 


e  explain- 
voheeUng 
ing  every 
an  moves 
It  several 
;ls  alonei 
)lies  that 
direction^ 
ightfaccy 
tea  rank 
direction 


The  squad  being  marched  and  wheeled  by  the  leftt  return  to 
the  original  position,  and  face  to  the  front,  as  before  ;  the  drill 
now  requires  to  mix  the  movements,  by  facing  and  wheeling 
in  different  directions.  The  words  are  given  with  an  interval.... 
which  produce  the  following  disposition : 

BighU,„face. 
Left.,.,wheeh 

S8S8SSS3S88SSSM 

He  then  changes  his  flank)  and  commences  the  opposite 
disposition  with) 


Left.,.^ace. 
Iiight.,»v}ht€L 


H 
H 

H   ,: , 

Z9ZZZtT9ZZZ9Z99 

The  company  is  now  marched  into  the  firtt  position,  and  re- 
ceives the  word.... 
HaU,.,.re8t, 
When  they  have  been  well  exercised  in  these  facings  and 
wheelings,  they  will  have  learned  to  mark  time  with  accuracy.... 
the  whole  rank  giving  but  one  sound  with  their  feet....they  will 
have  learned  to  £ice  in  three  short  curved  steps,  and  to  face 
to  the  right  about  in  three  long  curved  steps.  They  will  have 
their  ears  habituated  to  wait  for  the  word  of  execution ;  if  they 
have  not  acquired  these  habits,  the  fault  must  be  in  the  officer 
who  teaches.  It  is  impos8ible,'well  taught,  that  these  effects 
ars  not  produced. 

These  instructions  and  the  method  of  movement,  correspond 
in  every  particular  with  the  infantry  movements,  as  do  all  the 
movements  in  the  rank ;  and  are  therefore  literally  the  same  ; 
but  as  the  Infantry  Hand  Book  may  not  fall  into  the  same 
hands,  it  will  be  necessary  to  adopt  so  much  of  chap.  VII.  of 
the  Infantry  Hand  Book  as  is  necessary  to  render  this  Hand 
Book  complete  in  itself. 


I, 


;  c  1 


I 


18 


VIBST  FBIKCIPLKS   or 


f  ■ 


{i 


I'-i 


H 


I  ■ 


i! 

'1' 

■ 


|l 


-,'.. 


,!'*-•. 


CHAP.  in. 


§1.1  HE  object  of  moving  infantry  of  the  line  in  small 
sections  or  platoons,  is  either  to  pass  some  object  with  facility} 
to  render  a  movement  easy  and  rapid,  or  to  accommodate  the 
order  of  the  battalion  to  the  ground  which  is  to  be  moved  upon. 
The  same  princi]iles  apply  in  similar  circumstances  to  riflemen ; 
but  the  movements  of  the  battalion  in  Ime  have  always  refer- 
ence to  comfiactnesa,  and  consistency  in  action  ;  they  are  never 
open  in  action  ;  while  on  the  other  hand,  riflemen  on  their 
peculiar  service,  always  move  in  a  loose  order  ;  not  so  open  as 
to  lose  their  mutual  support  and  dependence,  but  they  always 
present  to  an  enemy  an  open  and  constantly  moving  order  ;  a 
rifleman  in  the  face  of  an  army  never  tarries  on  one  spot  longer 
than  while  he  fires  ;  he  moves  in  front  on  a  line  parallel  with 
the  line  of  the  enemy,  and  retires  in  an  indirect  line  ;  and  he 
retires  the  moment  he  fires,  when  his  place  is  supplied  by 
another  file  who  pursues  the  same  course. 

It  was  necessary  to  explain  this,  in  order  to  show  how  the 
same  method  of  instruction  applies  to  two  different  modes  of 
practice.  ,  -;'; 

The  riflemen  on  the  wings  or  in  the  front  of  the  line, 
opening  an  action,  or  covering  the  manoeuvres  of  the  columns 
or  the  line,  always  move  to  the  front  in  Indian  file,  or  by  the 
heads  of  sections  of  single  files  or  of  double  files,  at  two  paces 
apart,  flank  and  front.. ..either  from  the  flanks,  or  from  an  inter- 
val made  in  a  battalion  by  a  temporary  quarter  wheel  of  a  platoon 
or  half  platoon  ;  it  is  therefore  particularly  necessary  that  they 
be  at  all  times  ready  to  move  in  any  number  of  sections  re- 
quired ;  for  this  reason  it  is  necessary  to  practise  the  move- 
ments by  heads  of  sections,  with  great  perseverance  and  dexte- 
rity ;  and  by  one  word  of  command  ;  here  we  find  the  great 
uses  if  the  simple  but  invaluable  contrivance  of  telling  off", 
wl  ich  the  men  themselves  should  be  accustomed  to  do.  This 
wi"  be  round  in  tlie  progress  of  the  drill,  anti  of  the  more  enlarg- 
ed rrovements,  of  the  greatest  iinporlance,  as  it  will  at  length 
become  a  habit  in  the  minds  of  the  men  to  know  their  place  in 


: 


k 


"^., 


HIVIE   DIICIFXINK. 


19 


e  line  in  small 
t  with  facilityi 
onimodate  the 
B  moved  upon. 
IS  to  riflemen ; 
always  refer- 
hey  are  never 
men  on  their 
ot  so  open  as 
t  they  always 
^ing  order  ;  a 
ne  spot  longer 
;  parallel  with 
line  ;  and  he 
s  supplied  by 

how  how  the 
:ent  modes  of 

of  the  line, 

f  the  columns 

lie,  or  by  the 

,  at  two  paces 

from  an  inter- 

:el  of  a  platoon 

jary  that  they 

sections  re- 

se  the  move- 

ce  and  dextc- 

nd  the  great 

of  telling  off, 

to  do.     This 

more  enlarg- 

mll  at  length 

llieir  place  in 


the  rank,  and  they  will  with  ease  be  capable  of  formations  on 
any  front,  without  previously  telling  off,  or  in  any  other  direc- 
tion that  is  required  by  the  general  word  of  command.  The 
officer  will  give  the  word, 

Attention. 

And  he  will  follow  it  by  the  precautionary  information  of 
what  movements  are  proposed  to  be  made. 

The  company  will  tell  off  its  number  of  files 

fiiom  right  to  left. 
Tell  off. 


i  = 


c 
w 

S      B 

V         0) 


«    5- 


c 

a 


«3      «< 


« 


■       U 


a     c     V     <n 


Si 


4> 


O      t) 
w      O 


HHHtlHftttMttllffMMffMMMMMN 

The  officer  then  states  as  precautionary  : 

There  are  twenty  fileay  which  will  form  two  aectiona. 

JVo.  1,  is  the  right. ...JVo.  10,  the  left  of  the  first  aection. 

JVo.  II,  i»  the  right. ...M).  20,  the  left  rf  the  second  aection. 
The  two  sections  will  now  take  care  to  execute  ihe  same  move 
menta  by  one  word  of  command. 

Tlie  whole....mark  time. 

The  whole  raise  the  left  foot  gently  about  four  inches  from 
the  ground  together,  strike  it  briskly  to  the  ground  together ; 
raising  the  right  foot  and  striking  it  also,  and  so  each  foot 
alternately,  which  they  must  on  all  occasions  continue  to  do 
until  they  receive  the  word  halt.  The  officer  will,  to  give  them 
the  time,  tell  constantly  until  they  are  well  drilled  co  time.... 
one,  two, ...one,  two.  The  officer  will  then  give  the  precaution  : 

The  whole  will  take  care  to  face  to  the  right 

AND  to    wheel   to    THE   RIGHT  for  rear)  BY   HEADS 
OF  SECTIONS. 

The  whole...HgM  face. 

JBy  heads  of  8Cctions....right  wliecl. 

This  presents  the  first  disposition,  of  single  flics,  and  the 
fust  movement  in  broken  ranks. 


MHi 


m 


■*•«•..-.. 


.jd§ 


: 


'■-f   ^1 


1 1 

'  in 


^) 


1 


./ 


,  I 


i  I 

:    .^ 
'    'I 


If     •  ; 

i  'i 


!    ( 


30 


¥IRST  PBINCIPLES  OF 


88988S8SS 

■      % 


The  sections  are  now  marched  and  wheeled  to  the  right, 
and  again  brought  to  their  first  ground  and  fronted;  when  thejr 
receive  the  precaution: 

The  ^hole  witi.  takb  cars  to  face  to  the  left, 

AMD  WHEBf.  TO  THE  LEFT* 


The  whole,..deft...^ace. 
Heads  of  8ection8.„.left,„»w1ieel. 


SSS8S 


zzzz 


zzzzz 

M 
M 


zzzz 


The  whole  being  repeatedly  wheeled  by  the  left,  and  brought 
into  their  first  position  in  single  rank,  will  proceed  to  move- 
ments on  the  centre. 

$  2,  The  squad  will  now  proceed  to  execute  facings  inward 
from  the  flanks,  and  movements  by  the  centre. 

The  sections  will  take  caue  to  face  inward  (or 
to  the  centre)  and  advance  in  double  files  to  the 

FRONT. 

This  operation  will  be  performed  by  the  right  section  facing 
to  the  left,  and  the  left  facing  to  the  right,  and  the  left  man  of 
the  right  section,  and  the  right  man  of  the  left  section,  facing 
to  the  front ... 

These  two  centre  men,  form  the  pivots  in  this  motion,  and 
attending  to  precautionary  words,  advance  in  doable  files  from 
the  centre  to  the  front ;  they  should  remain  faced  to  the  front; 
when  the  following  command  is  given : 

fieclions».do  the  cmtre....in7vard....face. 
From  the  ceutre....heads  of  sections. 
To  the  front  v}h€el,..murch. 


i 


BIFI.B  DI8CIPLINK. 


2i 


THE   LEFT, 


ed  to  move- 


n 


MM 
MM 

^/M  Mv^ 
999999999ZZZZZZZZZ 

The  next  position  shows  this  column  of  double  files  faced  to 
the  right  about,  marching  to  the  same  ground  they  had  left,  on 
the  following  words  of  precaution  and  command : 

The  whole,.,j^ht  ahout,»^ace. 
Heads  of  8ection8,»„outward„.»wheel. 

MM 
M  M 
MM 

J^M  M^ 
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ9ZZZ 

The  whole  will  resume  the  first  position  on  reaching  the 
ground,  on  the  word.... 

Mark  time....frotitface,..,halt. 

The  teacher  of  the  drill  may  require  to  be  here  again  remind- 
ed, that  though  the  course  of  movements,  or  the  different  forms, 
are  progressive,  he  must  in  his  practice  resort  frequently  to 
those  movements  already  taught,  so  as  indeed  to  keep  the  word 
of  command  and  the  manner  of  evolution  constantly  present  to 
the  memory,  until  they  become  a  habit^  until  the  language  of  the 
exercise  and  the  mode  of  movement  in  exercise  become  pre- 
dominant over  every  other  habit. 


§  3.  The  next  movement  will  be  from  the  outward  flanks  oF 
the  two  sections  by  opposite  motions  to  the  rear,  then  moving 
in  directions  parallel  to  their  original  front ;  gaining  their  first 
ground  by  facing  to  the  right  about,  and  each  resuming  its 
former  position  by  corresponding  wheels. 

The  whole.„,mark  time. 

From  tlie  centre...,right  and  ltft.,»outward,;iface. 

Ihuds  of  sections..,.to  the  rear  rvhecl. 


U 


mi\ 


/  •'!' 


l\  I! 


1^ 
(I 


i  J 


1    V 


)i  i 


If 


!.i 


II  '! 


I  i 


1    ; 


!-H 


22 


FIRST   FBIlfOIPLES  OF 


The  right  section  here  faces  and  wheels  to  the  right....the 
left,  to  the  left» 


•i^ 


ssssss 

333388 

II 

M 

By  another  wore 

.    i " 

Jnward.,.,w1ieeL    , 

.1 .  ,   ■    -'i  V 

ZZZZ 

3338 

If 

^•1 

8SSS8SII 

They  move  towards  each  other,  where  they  may  be  dressed 
and  fronted,  or  execute  any  of  the  former  movements  at  the  dis« 
cretion  of  the  officer.  When,  in  order  to  be  brought  to  their 
first  position,  they  are  faced  from  the  rigfit  about  and  wheeled 
again  into  their  first  position. 

Mark  time.... 

The  wlwle....right  about....face,      ' 

Heads  of  8ection8..,.front....rvh€el.     *    ;     .'       '* 


n     ■ 

_,.,/      ••-' ,  f.-\.- '         n 

n 

I    ..'':■■ »                  M 

H^e    • 

J^ 

zzzzzzzzz 

333333833 

These  movements  are  illustrated  in  a  perspicuuus  manner, 
in  plate  I.  annexed,  which  will  be  further  illustrated  in  a  sub- 
sequent stage  of  the  drills.  ,       , 

These  movements  should  be  followed  by  countermarching  ; 
which  means  only  the  act  of  the  two  extremes  of  the  same  rank 
changing  places  by  military  marching. 


§  4.  The  practice  of  countermarches  in  drill  may  be  employed 
to  the  greatest  advantage  in  fixing  the  exactness  of  time^  and  the 
length  of  the  pace ;  in  habituating  the  men  to  wheeling  without 


'r^rc* 


I 


RIFLE  DISCIPLINE.  O 

cun  fusion  in  the  midst  of  varied  movements  and  ranks,  each  file 
always  attending  to  the  evolution  in  which  each  is  particularly 
engaged,  and  not  attending  to  the  movements  of  others. 

The  rank  is  now  supposed  to  be  divided  at  the  centre,  and  the 
object  in  view  is  so  to  march  them  that  the  files  on  the  right 
shall  be  brought  to  the  left ;  and  those  on  the  lefl  brought  to  the 
right.  Being  in  one  rank  and  faced  outward,  if  they  both  wheel 
about  on  the  same  line,  they  must  meet,  and  cannot  pass  each 
other  without  deviating ;  it  must  be  so  ordered  that  the  sections 
move  one  by  the  front  and  the  other  by  the  rear ;  this  will  be 
accomplished  by  the  fiiUowing  precaution  and  commands.... 

Mtentiotu 

The  sections  will  take  care  to  counteemarch 

UPON  THEIR  FRESENT  GROUND,  AND  FORM  FACED  TO 
THE   REAR. 

Section8,..,ovtward  faxe^  t-  ;*   v. 

Heads  of  8ecHon8„^right  ahout....wheel.        V'* 
Countermarch....march,  **' 


They  will  then  move  in  this  form. 


^*     li*';       U>: 


SSSSCSSSS      333333333 

When  they  have  so  marched  as  that  the  rear  of  each  section 
covers,  in  this  form.... 

SSSSSS33SS  '       '  ^'  '  '" 

3333333333 

They  receive  the  words  of  command.... 

Mark  time. 

Bear  face...,dre88.,.JiaU» 

As  soon  as  they  receive  the  M'ord  rear  face^  they  perform 
that  motion  ;  on  the  word  dreus^  the  section  on  the  left  being  a 
fiuce  out  of  the  line,  steps  up  and  dresses  by  the  left,  and  pre- 
sent this  position.... 

iiii«iiifiiiiiiiiiii«iiie9fii§iifififiii 


m 


!i 


'Wf^  -   "^  ^^* 


!Mrl 


1    i 


li" 


1 


w 


Mi 

1  i  lii 


(:|!i, 


.ff: 


11 


^vi 


9k  FIRST  PSIirOIPIJSS  ov 

The  company  is  then  brought  by  the  right  about  /ace,  to  its 
former  position,  dressed  and  halted :  and  is  informed  that  it 
is  intended  to  take  a  position  to  the  rear  of  the  present  ground 
twenty  paces,  faced  to  the  rear,  and  that  this  will  be  executed 
by  countermarching. 

Mtmtion, 

.  Take  care  to  take  post  in  the   hear  twbntt 
paces  by  countermarch  from  the  flanks. 

Section8,.„oulward  face, 

Mear„..w1ieeL  .^  ':  [ 

Inward,...wh€€L 

Rear  face, 
Mark  time. 

Right  alout,„faee„„dre88„,.ha1t, 

M/^  ..,•..   99Z9999999Z 

w  •• 

II  »^    4.B  II 

MMIIMIIIIMWIIIIIIMIIMMMMMII 

The  company  is  brought  to  the  right  about  and  halted. 
There  will  be  only  two  more  movements  of  countermarch  here 
specified ;  the  officer  of  the  drill,  preserving  the  main  princi- 
pies  of  cadence,  length  of  /lacCf  wheeling  upon  fiivota,  cannot 
Yary  his  exercises  of  countermarching  too  much  ;  he  may  form 
squares,  orbs,  and  other  figures, by  wheeling  round  any  number 
of  a  section,  and  facing  the  whole  to  the  right  about,  unfold  the 
figure,  and  display  his  rank ;  it  is  a  great  object  in  discipline  to 
render  exercises  amusing  to  the  men ;  exercise  becomes  then  a 
recreation  which  never  tires,  and  by  which  discipline  is  better 
established  than  by  cruelty  or  abuse,  or  ungenerous  treatment. 

These  drills  will  have  prepared  i'ne  men  for  the  next  stage  of 
the  drill,  that  of  forming  larger  sections. 


%  5.  The  next  progression  of  formation  will  be  into  files  of 
three,  or  sections  of  three  in  front. 


\'-,i^i^^":  •■  \„A<f^.'i"\[ 


■  i,^..--  «.»'»^»<"«(i 


M 


BIFLE  DISCIPLINE. 


u 


A  single  rank  being  formed  as  usual,  it  will  be  required  to  tell 
off  by  sections  of  three  from  right  to  left ;  and  the  movements 
of  the  sections  will  now  be  so  ordered,  that  by  the  advance  of  the 
first  section  of  three  from  the  ground,  and  an  immediate  wheel 
of  the  section  upon  its  left,  the  :iuccessi\e  sections  will  be  taken 
up  in  their  proper  places,  as  the  preceding  sections  proceed  along 
the  front.  By  this  means  steadiness  is  obtained  in  the  rank,  dis- 
tance is  easier  preserved,  and  when  the  whole  have  formed  into 
the  column  of  sections  of  three,  wheelings  in  that  order  may  be 
practised,  and  the  accuracy  of  the  pace  tested  by  every  wheel  of 
section,  and  corrected  with  the  most  careful  exactness.  Atten- 
tion to  exactness  at  this  period  saves  a  great  deal  of  trouble,  and 
expedites  discipline  beyond  belief. 

Precautions.  ^  ., 

The  comfiany  will  firoceed  to  move  by  sectiona  of  three  ;  they 
will  tell  off  by  threes  from  right  to  left ;  the  left  hand  man,  or 
fie  that  tells  three,  ivill  be  the/iivot  of  each  section  of  three  wheel- 
ing on  the  left ;  should  the  comjiany  wheel  on  the  right  in  sections 
of  three,  the  right  hand  man  of  each  section  will  be  thefiivot. 


Jlttention. 

Sections  of  three....tell  off. 

1'hc  officer  will  see  that  no  file  misses  or  repeats  the  number, 
and  that  it  be  one,  two,  three,  from  right  to  left.... the  right  hand 
man  saying  one,  8tc. 

3213213213213  21321 

MHMHHtlNtlttftlfillliMHItHtt 

Take  care  to  advance  fuom  the  right  by  s»c- 
tions  of  '1uree....wheeling  by  the  left  on  thk 

FUONT. 


Company..,.mark  time. 
Bij  sections  of  three... from  the  right.... 
I'orward.,..march.  ^'>■■■^ 

Left...,wheel.  », ,.    . 


r.?i.;i 


I         I 


E 


if 


J6 


flBlT  PRINCIPLES   OF 


(.' 


At  the  word  marchy  the  first  section  steps  out  with  the  left 
foot,  and  continues  to  mark  time  in  that  position,  until  the  word 
le/i  is  given,  at  wliich  word  the  left  hand  man,  who  is  the  pivot 
of  the  section,  faces  to  the  left,  and  marks  time  till  the  word 
wheel  is  given,  when  the  other  two  men  step  off  and  wheel 
upon  their  pivot.... and  the  sections  step /orwarc/  at  the  word, 
and  so  each  section  of  three  in  succession.  "■ 


S         SHMM 
MNHMHttHMMHttftHMH 

The  same  course  of  movements  is  now  to  be  pursued,  as  in 
the  first  lessons  of  single  files ;  and  the  wheelings  are  to  be  exe- 
cuted upon  the  same  principles  from  the  left  flank  to  the  front 
an  '  rear.  The  first  formation  of  the  rank  by  reducing  the  co- 
lumn is  made  by  left  wheelings  from  the  preceding  position,  as 
exemplified  in  the  following  figure  ;  the  company  being  by  re- 
peated wheelings  brought  to  its  first  position,  so  that  the  left 
files  shall  stand  on  the  ground  from  wliich  they  first  moved. 
They  receive  the  precaution : 

Take  care  to  form  front,  by  wheeling  on  the 

LEFT    of    sections. 

Mark  time. 
Sections,..,ltft,...wheel. 


H  •  •  ft 


H 


8 
S 


if  ^ 
3 


ft 


M 

3 


M 

3 
3 


3»^ 


s..( 


Upon  the  word  le/i,  the  left  hand  man,  or  pivot  of  the  section, 
faces  to  the  left,  which  is  the  original  front.... the  rest  wait  for 
the  word  wheel,  when  they  move  into  their  positions,  as  before. 

The  rank  may  be  brought  into  column  of  three  in  front,  by 
the  following  command : 

Take  care  to  form  column  of  sections  of  three. 
left  in  front.  *      ■ 

Sections  of  tkree:..left.,..whecL 


■X 


'"'rfffrnt  I  ■>■'-■>•—-  ■ 


'■aaii^^jn 


.■■>*..j«Jf-»i-a.'. 


'"^i'^T- 1^- 


RIIXE  DISCIPLINE. 


27 


ING   ON   THE 


S  OF  THREES 


s 


s     s 
z     z 

Z"Z 


SHNSMMSHM 


The  left  half  of  this  figure  describes  the  position  after  the 
command  is  accomplished ;  the  right  half,  as  at  the  word  lejt. 

They  may  now  be  marched  left  in  front,  faced  to  the  right, 
and  marched  by  heads  of  sections ;  faced  again  to  the  right, 
when  the  right  will  be  in  front;  and  wheeled  into  line  and 
halted. 


§  6.  Tlie  drills  are  now  to  be  continued  by  single  rank,  but 
with  sections  formed  from  the  division  of  the  rank. 

The  company  being  paraded  as  usual,  ranked  and  sized,  tliey 
will  be  told  that  the  rank  is  now  to  be  divic.t- d  into  two  parts, 
each  of  which  will  be  called  a  division,  or  half  platoon,  ui  order 
to  distinguish  the  half  of  the  squad  from  lesser  sections;  he 
centre  will  be  told  off,  and  the  whole  will  receive  the  word  of 
precaution. 

Attention* 

The  company  will  move  by  sections  of  threk  from 

THE  right  of  half  PLATOONS. 

By  sections  of  three....from  tlie  right  of  divisions.*.. 

Forward....'march. 
Left. ...wheel. 

«     «1j  z     Z^ 

z    zznn       z    zzhn 

fftlifMftM  MftHHHH 

This  movement,  it  will  be^perceived,  differs  from  the  move- 
ment from  the  right  of  the  rank,  only  in  the  division  of  the  rank 
into  two  parts,  which,  if  the  drill  be  full,  may  be  called  first 
and  second  platoon  instead  of  divisions  ;  or,  right  and  left  platoon ; 
if  small,  they  may  be  called  half  platoons. 

From  the  sections  of  three,  the  progress  may  be  to  sections 
of  five,  which  will  be  executed  in  a  single  rank  in  the  same 
manner,  and  all  the  corresponding  evo  utions  will  be  practised 
as  in  the  formation  and  movements  in  single  file. 


7 

f 


t  ■ 


|. 


i 


1^ 


1-1 ' 


I 

'     ill' 


H 


.(^f: 


,1 1 


1 1 


1   I'M  •(;,; 


!^ 


.     , 


38  fIR8T  PRINCIPLES   OF 

$  7.  It  may  be  proper  to  remark  here  once  more,  that  there 
is  great  utility  in  this  method  of  wheeling  into  column  from  the 
right  upon  the  front  of  the  rank ;  as  it  secures  the  dress  of  the 
rank,  and  determines  the  time  of  stepping  ofi*,  for  every  succeed- 
ing section,  in  a  manner  much  better  adapted  to  assure  correct- 
ness than  any  other  method.  The  same  may  be  done  from  the 
left  of  the  rank,  for  the  same  purpose,  as  soon  as  the  habit  is  a 
little  formed  to  evolution. 

As  the  rifle  corps  will  have  to  move  in  sections,  particularly 
by  heads  of  sections  in  Indian  tile,  both  in  advancing  in  front 
or  on  the  flank  of  the  battalion  in  line  of  battle,  und  in  retiring 
upon  their  line,  or  in  passing  woods  or  thickets,  it  is  inciispensi- 
ble  that  they  learn  the  method  of  infantry  formation  of  sections, 
in  order  to  arrive  at  correct  ideas  of  the  method  of  forming  and 
reducing  sections.  The  drill  must  therefore  i)egin  as  in  the  in- 
fantry, with  the  smallest  sections,  that  is  sections  of  'hree  and 
^ve^  as  the  same  principles  upon  which  they  are  executed,  ex- 
tend to  sections  of  larger  number  in  front. 

The  officer  will  explain  these  principles,  and  she^>v  that  as  it 
is  easier  to  pass  through  woods  with  a  siiigle  man  mi  front,  than 
•with  two  or  a  whole  rank  ;  it  will  be  necessary  to  be  prepared  at 
all  times  to  move  in  sections  of  any  required  number. 

The  drills  will  then  proceed  to  movements  from  the  flanks, 
that  is  from  the  right  or  left  ends  of  the  ranks  or  half  ranks  ; 
two  sections  moving  at  the  same  time,  by  one  word,  as  in  the 
following  : 

tlttetition. 

Thb  company  will  take  care  to  move  by  sections 
of  five  from  thk  right  of  half  platoons, 

The  company  being  divided  into  two  half  platoons,  say  of  ten 
files  each  ;  the  first  five  files  on  the  right  of  the  whole  rank,  and 
the  first  five  files  on  t/.e  right  of  the  second  half  platoon,  will 
move  at  the  same  moment  and  on  the  same  word ;  and  they  will 
tell  ofl*  in  the  following  manner : 


5    4 


4      3      2     1 


15     4     3 


M  i^  §f  If  £1  ft  ft  §i  if  if  If  IS  $f  f$  §t  §1  if  it  «i  ft 

They  will  then  receive  the  Avord, 


RIFLE   DISCIFLINK. 


Mark  time. 
By  sections  of  pivb  from  rioht  of  half  platoons, 
Fotnx>urd....march. 
Left»...wheel. 

S      S      .  S      S 

S      S  S      S 

S      SSMtftIM  C      SSflffffHIl 

ffltftftffil  MNftlftf 

The  number  of  files  here  given  in  the  sections  wheeled  are 
for  the  purjwse  of  presenting  the  form  of  the  movement  in  a 
more  striking  manner.  The  whole  should  be  moved  in  two 
columns,  in  the  manner  of  infantry,  and  wheeled  in  various 
directions ;  faced  to  the  right  about,  and  to  the  left,  and  sections 
countermarched  by  their  heads  and  brought  into  their  proper 
positions  again. 

In  rifle  discipline,  the  practice  must  be  constant  of  moving  by 
heads  of  sectiQns....thus  the  whole  being  now  formed  into  two 
columns  of  five  in  front,  they  will  exhibit  this  disposition : 


K?- 


ff  tt  it  td  if 

it  it  ii  ii  it 
it  it  it  it  it 


it  it  it  it  ft 
ft  it  if  ft  ft 

ft  if  if  ft  ft 

It  is  required  to  take  ground  in  that  order  to  the  right,  and 
the  wor4  is  given, 

The  whole....  ' 

Bighl....face. 

They  present  the  following  order  : 

33333    33338 
3c»<»33    33333 


3  3  3  3  >» 


33333 


It  is  required  to  retire ;  and,  as  the  primitive  order,  or  the 
order  in  which  the  ranks  originuUy  stood,  must  be  kept  in  view 
■whertn'cr  the  niovement  is  not  impeded  by  adhering  to  it,  the 


^, 


30 


FIB8T  PRINCIPLES  OF 


.      M 


.  I.  >     \ 


}>  'i 


V     (IV 


1  ! 


proper  course  will  be  to  wheel  by  their  right,  by  heads  of  sec- 
tions, as  that  will  bring  them  into  their  first  order,  with  only  the 
necessity  of  countermarcl  ng  each  section  to  the  right  about.... 
they  then  receive  the  w  ord, 

Sections  of  five,  • 

By  heads  of  8ection8..,.right  wheel. 
The  sections  on  the  left  as  now  laced,  will  each  advance  a 
number  of  paces  equal  to  the  number  of  sections  on  their  right, 
and  wheel  in  the  following  manner : 


»^             33333 
33333 

21.                  : 

333M 

^M 
3333 
M 

•»333 

• 

•     4 

S333M 

•                       • 

fM 

♦m 

fM 
*M 

fM 

fM 

fM       fM 
*M        *M 

M 

M 

M 

M 

M          M 

M 

M 

M 

/    w 

M          M 

M 

M 

M 

M 

M          M 

The  sections  are  now  in  their  original  position,  only  faced  to 
the  rear. ...to  bring  them  to  their  first  position,  they  receive  the 
word. 

By  heads  of  sections.... 
Count€rmarch..,.march. 


§  8,  At  this  period,  if  they  have  not  already  acquired  the  in- 
fantry discipline,  they  should  learn  the  principles  oi  ec/iello  isy  a 
species  of  movement  which  is  well  adapted  to  the  advance  and 
retreat  of  rifle  corps  ;  after  they  have  performed  the  perpendi- 
cular echellons,  they  must  be  accustomed  to  move  by  single  file 
from  the  /(•/?,  or  from  the  right  of  secdons  to  the  front  or  rear, 
to  countermarch  and  fire  in  echellons  of  Indian  files.  The  first 
instructions  in  the  practice  of  echellons  may  begin  with  secdons 
ofhve..  .It  is  understood,  that  the  company  is  already  ranked, 
sized,  told  oJ7\  and  that  all  the  movements  must  be  in  marked  time. 
Attention. 

Thk  company  will  take  care  to  form  echellons 
upon  the  left  section  of  five. 


!!• 


»A^  *•    -  ■  -^iv.j 


RITLB  DISOIPLimB. 


SI 


The  left  tection  will  keefi  if  ground. 

The  third  aection  vdll  advance  a  number  qf  ftaeea  equal  to  itt 

front. 
The  tecond  aection  will  advance  a  number  qf  pacea  equal  t9 

double  ita  front. 
And  the  frat  aection  will  advance  a  number  of  pacea  equal  t9 
triple  ita  front. 
Upon  the  left  form  eehdhma, 
Forwavd..,.march. 
They,  thereupon,  form  the  following  disposition : 

iHHHMH 


^nnnnn 


N  M  H 11  n 


I 


^  tt  ft  tt  tt  f§ 

As  the  sections  are  to  advance  perpendicularly  to  the  front, 
a  number  of  paces  equal  to  the  i'ront  of  the  sections  from  right 
to  left ;  there  being  four  sections,  and  one  of  them  remain  ng 
on  its  position,  the  right  section  will  have  to  move  a  number  of 
paces  equal  to  the  front  of  three  sections  of  five  files,  so  that 
the  right  will  have  to  &<  Mice  15  paces,  the  second  10  paces, 
and  the  third  5  paces ;  these  principles  should  be  inculcated 
every  opportunity ;  and  the  echellon  is  particularly  adapted  to 
teach  it  accurately  aiul  test  it  by  wheeling  on  the  right  or  lefl 
of  sections,  which  ^vjn  present  echellons  on  the  front  faced  to ; 
but  in  single  movements,  they  are  to  present  as  small  a  front  as 
possible  ;  they  n^ust,  therefore,  be  moved  by  heads  of  sections 
at  all  timr  n  within  point  blanc  distance  ;    the  company 

must  be  ')rr  .d  of  this,  and  that  the  formation  in  parallel 
ranks  is  di  Unary,  and  intended  to  teach  what  infantry  do, 
so  that  when  seen  it  may  be  known  what  they  are  doing- 


32 


FlAST  PRINCIPLES   0¥ 


!■■,-•! 


]  I 


In  order  to  shew  the  mode  in  which  they  must  move,  it  will 
be  important  to  practise  them  at  this  point  of  the  drill,  in  ad- 
vancing by  heads  of  sections  in  echellon,  advancing  the  right 
and  left  flanks  alternately,  then  advancing  the  centre,  reserving 
both  flanks ;  thv;  front  or  leading  file  of  the  advanced  section 
making  the  motions  of  firing  to  the  front,  and  retiring  by  the 
left... .and  they  must  be  told  here,  that  in  all  instances  of  retiring 
after  firing,  whether  in  extended  order,  or  in  file,  tliey  must 
advance  by  the  right  and  retire  by  the  )eft....the  following  dispo- 
sition will  convey  some  idea  of  the  manner : 

^Iteniion. 

The  company  will  advance  in  echellons  from 
thk  cen1re,  by  heads  of  sections  in  indian 
file.. ..the  flank  sections  thrown  back. 

Mark  time. 

Sections.„.from  the  i'ight....hy  Indian  file..., 

¥orward....march. 

They  present  this  order : 


!       If 


1 


II 

M 

M 

t  »  '.,  / ' 

M 

' 

# 

II 

H 

# 

4 

M 

•■     ■ 

■W: 

.  ,  ■'- 

'  #   - 

.;:  :  . 

-■#■:■■ 

•^#'  -■" 

*'/■ 

M 

ft 

-#:-■' 

'# 

n 

5 

■#  .- 

M 

«a 

■  •  '■' 

w 

II 

•■  .    J 

"n. 

It 

w 

i% 


t 


III 


M 


move,  it  will 
e  drill,  in  ad- 
ig  the  right 
re,  reserving 
need  section 
tiring'  by  the 
es  of  retiring 
;,  they  must 
owing  dispo- 


LLONS    FROM 
IN    INDIAN 
BACK. 


It 

If 

H 

!l 

o 

it 

•1 

ft 

1 

ft 

1 

•  •  •   • 

RIFLE   DI9GIFLIKE. 


$a 


There  &re  seven  secticms  shown  here,  for  the  purpose  of  ex- 
plaining the  various  movements :  in  the  preceding  movement, 
the  fourth  section  advances  by  files  from  the  right ;  and  the 
sections  3  and  5  on  its  right  and  left,  advance  directly  in  the 
same  order,  but  their  heads  not  so  far  advanced,  and  in  succes- 
sion 2  and  6,.Mand  1  and  7  are  On  an  6qtial  fh)nt. 

>  The  SBCnONS  Vfltt  FIttb,  and  RBflRE  fiY  THE  LEFT, 

.■'  THE  FLAMit  SBCTIOMtf  ADVANCED.  :      .mt    <         ••    >'M>'^, 

y,  ■-,.   Centre  8ecti(m8,...hy  the  1tft.,..retirei      f         n  :v,^u 
March. 
They  then  present  th6  following  dispositions ;  the  centre  hav- 
ing retired,  countermarch  to  its  original  ffoiit :        '      ; 


'  '; 

7    /^ 

/^ 

•. , 

J 

Wit 

■?^?f        ■  f -j;?* 

i    ,.<]    '     r: 

•ill 

7 

•f  H 

.,U   .,   i 

'■■•.      '!.}    liM 

Hit 

1 

H 

6     it 

•-:',.  '     >i- 

-  all        Hi 

2    it 

H 

H 

•n's«  <u;  '  < 

•1 

.J'^     •*''.      , 

w    , 

'.■(■, 

H 

-.  -V :  -  •    ■ " 

1   • 

Jlf^ 

^ 

II 
II 

II 

,-  ":!<.         '      . 

5 

II 

II    4 

Mil 

If 

M 

H 

39^ 


This  movement  shows  the  flank  sections  in  front;  the  centre 
retired,  is  exhibited  in  the  above,  section  4  has  already  come 
about  and  is  in  the  act  of  countermarching  to  the  front,  from 
which  it  had  retired  by  the  left ;  sections  3  and  5  are  on  the 
march  to  perform  the  same  movement ;  sections  2  and  6  are 
wheeled  about  by  the  left  by  heads  of  sections,  to  retire  the  same 
course ;  while  sections  1  and  7,  retain  their  positions. 

They  must  be  constantly  kept  in  mind  to  dressy  cover j  mark 
tmci  and  attend  to  the  words  of  command ;  and  in  these  move- 
ments, they  must  be  apprized,  that  they  are  intended  to  teach 
the  manner  of  going  into  action  and  retiring  from  it  ;  but  that 
the  manner  in  action  is  to  be  the  subject  of  subsequent  instructions. 


if  1 


i    'f 


iw 


i  I 


3^ 


FIRST  PRINCIPLES  OP 


\  , 


II 


'll 


]  i 

;•        1 

;■  i 


'  'S 


.  i'    i 


!  I' 


§  9.  They  will  be  next  instructed  in  the  manner  of  augment- 
ing and  diminishing  front,  for  disciplinary  purposes ;  and  they 
vrill  here  first  be  apprized  of  the  method  of  half  facing....this 
principle  will  be  necessary^  when  moving  in  a  ciixumscribed 
position,  crossing  bridges,  or  passing  defiles  where  there  is  no 
oppor'unity  of  acting  as  tirailleurs.        '  >.  ;  ■.!..-,  r,    tr 

This  principle  consists  in  augmenting  or  diminishing  front 
from  the  proper  flank,  and  to  the  proper  flank  when  moving  in 
open  or  in  close  column.  The  movements  are  to  be  acquired 
nlways  in  open  order. 

The  principle  consists  in  this  rule  ;  that  the  position  of  every 
file  in  he  line  shall  maintain  its  correspondence  through  every 
evolution.  This  may  be  understood,  by  counting  the  files,  be- 
ginning on  the  right,  and  supposing  the  whole  to  be  formed  int* 
sections  of  seven ;  the  sections  being  then  wheeled  upon  their 
right  into  column  of  seven  files  in  front,  the  disposition  shall  be 
such  as  that,  proceeding  from  right  to  left,  the  files  shall  be  con- 
tiguous as  they  first  stood ;  the  first  file  of  the  second  section, 
counting  8  and  the  last  14 ;  the  first  file  of  the  third  section, 
counting  15  and  the  last  21  ;  the  first  file  of  the  fourth  section, 
counting  22  and  the  last  28  ;  and  so  on.  Let  it  be  supposed, 
that  the  column  of  seven  files  front,  is  formed. 

HMMHttHM    Ist section. 
7    6    5    4    3     2    1 


li  liMt-'i 


jiif.[i 


HflHMMnM    2d  section. 
14  13  12  11  10   9    8 


,  1  ''•; 


;  T'<(-: .   ;:i' 


Sl!l?f!f?f!f? 


3d  section. 


Iff  it  If  M  it . 

2^  27  26  25  24  2 


4th  section. 


f  augment- 
I ;  and  they 
being.... thh 
cumscribed 
there  is  no 

shing  front 

moving  in 

be  acquired 

on  of  every 
ough  every 
he  files,  be- 
formed  int* 
I  upon  their 
ion  shall  be 
hall  be  con« 
ond  section} 
lird  section^ 
irth  section, 
e  supposed, 


RIBLE  DISCIPLINB. 


36 


It  is  required  to  augment  the  front  from  seven  to  nine  filesj 
so  as  to  make  a  column  of  nii  e  files  in  front. 
The  column  being  in  motion,  the  word  is  given : 

Take  care  to  augment  column  to  sections  of 

NINE    IN    front. 

To  render  the  first  formations  easy,  until  the  hc^bit  is  brought 
to  it,  the  column  may  be  brought  to  retain  its  position  in  column 
at  marked  time^  preserving  open  order  until  the  augmentation  of 
the  front  is  completed,  tor  which  purpose,  after  Uic  pi-ccaution 
is  given,  the  word 


'v.    ,!.■«   rl-> 


Mark  time. 

Farm  sections  of  nfne....ntarcfc. 

NHHMHHH 


'•>M'l' 


-lli 


f"    :.-(:   ■■'-■■■■  J   h:.'.' 


;   :'-":,  1 1.';  1 


;:f     i:'   )fl-_ 


•  ^■^,"    ,        ■  ' 


HHHHIt  ^«^ 


..»    ■     u 


HHH'^«^<^'^ 


H  ^<^^^^ 


This  view  represents  only  th^  movements  from  the  right, 
the  movements  from  the  left  to  occupy  the  spaces  vacated  on  the 
right,  are  performed  at  the  same  time  by  a  side  step,  by  direct 
facing  to  the  right,  when  on  the  ground,  without  advancing ;  or 
by  a  quarter  facing  and  advancing  on  a  diagonal  I>nc  so  as  to 
cover  the  ri^ht  hand  file  of  the  leading  section,  wlien  in  motion, 
which  must  be  performed  in  every  section  from  front  to  rear. 
The  diagonal  facings  must  be  by  every  single  man  from  his 


3tf 


FIB9T  PRINGIFLEI   OF 


"   I    / 


h'  •III 


front  to  the  direction  in  which  he  is  to  march  and  occupy^  his 
left  shoulder  in  the  rear  of  the  man  moving  before  him.  So  that 
the  augmentations  shall  always  come  from  the  right  of  each  sue* 
cessive  section  to  the  l^ft  of  the  section  in  its  front. 

The  augmentation  here  presents  an  appearance^  which,  by 
anticipation,  unfolds  the  nature  of  the  Line  qf  Science  or  diagonal 
movemeqt ;  as  the  front  section  must  be  necessarily  augmented 
by  the  files  that  would  count  next  to  it  in  the  rank,  the  two 
right  hand  iilon  of  thn  sprnnd  auction  necessarily  must  march 
diagonally  from  the  right  of  the  second  to  the  left  of  the  first, 
so  that  No.  9  becomes  the  left  file  of  the  first  section,  in  the 
place  of  No.  7;  and  No.  10  becomes  the  right  of  the  second  sec- 
tion ;  for  which  purpose,  that  file  must  move  two  paces  to  the 
right ;  this  second  section  having  been  deprived  of  two  men  on 
the  right,  in  order  to  possess  the  required  number.  No.  3  must 
obtain  four  men  from  the  right  of  the  third  secUon,  which  four 
must  move  diagonally  to  the  left  of  the  second  from  the  right  of 
the  third ;  and  so  the  sections  successively  receive  from  the 
right  of  the  sections  in  their  rear,  the  numbers  necessary  to  give 
them  their  required  front.  The  augmentation  being  constantly 
made  from  the  right  of  the  next  rear  section  to  the  left  of  the 
next  front  section. 

Let  it  not  be  kept  out  of  sight  an  instant,  that  all  these  chan- 
ges arc  to  be  executed  on  the  march  at  the  quick  time  of  a  lively 
dance. 

As  the  effect  of  riflemen  depends  very  much  on  the  use  of 
their  arms,  they  should  be  brought  to  that  branch  of  discipline  if 
not  already  taught  the  infantry  movements,  at  an  earlier  stage 
than  infantry  of  the  line  ;  the  drills  must  therefore  begin  with 
arms  at  this  stage.  . 


RIFLE  DISCIPLINE. 


tccupX)  his 
a.  So  tliat 
)f  each  suc- 

I  -which,  by 
or  diagonal 
augmented 
ik,  the  two 
nust  march 
of  the  first, 
tion,  in  the 
second  sec- 
)aces  to  the 
two  men  on 
No.  3  must 
,  which  four 
the  right  of 
e  from  the 
isary  to  give 
g  constantly 
e  left  of  the 

these  chan- 
ne  of  a  lively 

the  use  of 

discipline  if 

earlier  stage 

begin  with 


-I-..' 


■i:'- 


■1!)     1.'       ! 


Mi/f'..'  1 


CHIP  IV. 


J",    f     !<•     r' 


<'.j  i;... 


fflr- 


■,ni 


Ml 


■;.li;r 


$  1.  THE  FIRE  OF  RIFLE  CORPS. 


X  HE  duties  and  discipline  of  rifle  corps  are  determined 
by  the  nature  of  the  country  in  which  they  are  to  act.  They 
should  be  so  well  disciplined  in  the  movements  of  infantry  gene- 
rally, as  to  be  susceptible  of  action,  either  in  compact  or  detach- 
ed bodies ;  in  small  or  large  coi-ps ;  the  effect  of  their  force  de- 
pends on  the  activity  and  skill  of  every  individual.  In  particu- 
lar positions  they  must  act  and  manoeuvre  according  to  the  rules 
of  discipline  of  infantry  of  the  line.  In  other  positions  accord- 
ing to  rules  peculiar  to  their  own  distinct  branch  of  service  in 
extended  order.  A  skilful  commander  will  know  the  means  by 
which  they  may  be  employed  with  the  v;reatest  advantage ;  ju- 
dicious officers  will  be  ready  to  accommodate  their  movements 
to  the  general  design,  and  a  co-operation  with  the  other  des- 
criptions of  force.  If  circumstances  demand  that  they  act  with 
closed  ranks,  conjunctly  with  other  troops,  their  movements 
are  made  on  the  common  principles  of  the  movements  of  the 
line,  and  it  is  essential  that  rifle  corps  should  be  so  disciplined, 
because  without  it  their  value  would  be  in  some  measure  dimi- 
nished, especially  if  opposed  by  riflemen  who  are  possessed  of 
that  disciplinary  experience.  ,      -.  ,.,  - '--. 

Rifle  corps  should  on  their  first  instruction  in  military  discip- 
line pass  through  the  ordinary  drill  and  movements  of  a  compa- 
ny, and  afterwards  of  a  battalion  of  infantry.  This  is  essential : 
1st.  As  it  familiarizes  them  with  the  habits  and  movements  of 
troops  wherewith  they  act  in  conjunction  on  real  service.  2d. 
It  enables  them  to  come  at  once  into  battalion  service,  if  exi- 
gency demands  their  incorporation.  3d.  It  renders  familiar  the 
movements  of  an  enemy. 

During  a  campaign,  light  troops,  when  not  formed  in  regular 
battalions  and  in  a  populous  country,  are  usually  cantoned  in 
villages  or  farm  houses ;  and  are  generally  without  any  camp 
equipage ;  their  ammunition,  ams,  and  provisions,  being  drawn 


J.i 


n. 


'    I 


1  i;  I 


1 1 ; 


U 


•H  k 


\    l^lf 


3& 


TJKST  PS1NCIPXE8  OF 


fi-om  the  stores  of  the  division  to  which  they  are  attached.  If, 
however,  li}jht  infantry  or  rifle  corps  are  embodied  in  battalions 
or  regiments,  or  if  rifle  corps  are  attached  in  companies  to  regi- 
ments permanently,  they  may  be  occasionally  encamped  on  the 
flanks  of  their  regiments,  or  in  camps  either  in  the  line  or  ad- 
vance of  the  line,  or  largely  on  a  flank  in  a  right  angle  with  the 
line.  It  is  considered  as  conformable  to  the  spirit  of  rifle  corps 
that  they  do  not  carry  camp  equipage  into  the  field  on  actual 
service,  but  that  they  construct  huts  with  boughs  of  trees,  and 
that  in  the  intervals  of  actual  service  they  t  ke  a  tour  of  duty 
and  comply  in  every  respect  with  the  discipline  and  duties  of 
infantry. 

It  can  never  be  repeated  too  often,  nor  attended  to  too  much 
in  the  discipline  of  every  species  of  troops,  that  uniformity  in 
mat-ching  in  the  length  of  pace,  and  the  unity  or  cadence  of  the 
step,  and  in  quick  time,  is  the  most  important  part  of  military 
discipline.  With  riflemen,  celerity  of  movement  is  of  great 
importance,  and  in  projiortion  to  its  importance  it  is  essential 
that  it  should  be  precise  as  well  as  rapid,  and  invariable  under 
similar  circumstances. 

The  time  of  movement  and  the  length  of  the  step  is  the  same 
in  every  description  of  troops  that  move  on  foot,  and  is  to  be 
referred  to  the  practice  of  light  infantry  and  the  line.  All  move- 
ments to  1)6  made  in  paces  of  24  inches ;  the  riflemen  musty 
however,  be  accustomed  to  take  a  greater  number  of  paces  in  a 
minute  than  the  troops  of  the  line  ;  tlie  infantry  ordinary  pace  is 
76  in  a  minute  ;  the  riflemen  when  acting  independently,  should 
be  accustomed  to  90  paces  in  a  minute,  and  more  often  120. 

There  is  one  pace,  however,  peculiar  to  the  rifle  corps,  which 
is  better  understood  by  Americans,  under  the  denomination  of 
the  Indian  fiace,  or  Indian  file  step.  This  step  or  pace  is  re- 
quired only  when  riflemen  act  alone,  or  are  detached  from  the 
main  body  of  the  army.  The  rifle  is  then  carried  on  the  hori- 
zontal or  sloped  trail,  and  a  word  of  command  suitable  to  rifle- 
men, and  which  is  applicable  to  all  light  infantry  corps  in  simi- 
lar situations,  has  been  adopted.  It  is  the  word  "Change 
HANDS,"  by  which  it  is  intended  that  the  rifle  or  firelock  at  the 
trail  should  be  thrown  adroitly  from  the  hand  in  which  it  is 
then  carried  into  the  o:  her,  and  there  held,  till  the  same  word 
of  command  returns  it  lo  the  original  hand. 


Bins  DISCIPLIKB. 


t9 


iched.     If) 
n  battalions 
lies  to  regi- 
iped  on  the 
line  or  ad- 
rie  with  the 
f  rifle  corps 
d  on  actual 
if  trees,  and 
tour  of  duty 
nd  duties  of 

to  too  much 
iniformity  in 
idence  of  the 
rt  of  military 
t  is  of  great 
It  is  essential 
ariable  under 


The  trail  step,  or  Indian  Jiie  pace^  is  usually  made  without  any 
violence  of  the  body,  a  regular  constant  even  mcvemeni  of  the 
foot  twenty-four  inches  at  a  step ;  and  after  practice,  is  to  be 
performed  in  every  position,  whether  in  single  or  double  ranks, 
in  Indian  file,  or  in  open  or  extended  order.  The  drassing  in 
file  to  be  always  by  the  leading  file.  The  lines  dressed  by  the 
centre. 

Riflemen  are  formed  into  companies  of  equal  numbers  with 
the  battalions  or  regiments  of  the  establishment-  After  being 
taught  to  stand,  march,  face,  wheel,  direct  and  oblique,  and 
manoeuvre,  and  to  exercise  with  the  firelock  as  in  the  infantry, 
they  are  taught  the  particular  exercise  of  the  rifle,  which  is 
varied  in  a  few  particulars,  and  bears  some  analogy  to  their  im- 
medii:te  s^  rvice.  A  rifleman  is  never  supposed  to  leave  his 
rifle  unloaded,  and  contrary  to  the  rule  of  the  infantry,  who 
always  carry  their  arms  on  the  left  shoulder,  the  rifleman  car- 
ries his,  unless  when  he  shifts  it  for  rest,  on  his  right  side^. 
either  trailed  or  at  the  advance. 


■J    !' 


p  is  the  same 
and  is  to  be 
e.  AUmove- 
flemen  must, 
of  paces  in  a 
linary  pace  is 
ently,  should 
often  120. 
corps,  which 
lomination  of 
or  pace  is  re- 
;hed  from  the 
I  on  the  hori- 
itable  to  rifle- 
:orps  in  simi- 
•d  "  Change 
irelock  at  the 
n  which  it  is 
le  same  word 


^  2,  MAJ>rUJlL  EXERCISE. 

POSITION  ON  PARADE. 

■    .    .  -      _'',•>■'•■',.       ',  ,.     •,     •  ..  .  ■  ... 

The  company  being  ordered  to  Jail  in,  or  to  form,  either  in 
one  rank  or  in  two,  as  the  ofiicer  may  direct,  it  appears  dressed 
and  sized  as  in  infantry,  with  rifles  at  the  order. 

If  paraded  on  the  flank  of  a  battalion  and  in  close  order,  the 
riflemen  exercise  like  infantry  of  the  bjittalion ;  if  drawn  up  in 
the  extended  order,  they  perform  their  own  manual ;  the  only 
dHTerence  being  in  the  single  motion  of  the  advance,  which  the 
riflemen  in  open  order  always  execute  at  the  word  ahoulder. 

The  company  drawn  up  with  ordered  arms,  and  looking  well 
to  the  front ;  feet  near  two  inches  apart  at  the  heel  and  separated 
about  the  length  of  the  foot  at  the  toes,  so  that  if  a  foot  were 
placed  parallel  to  the  front  of  each  man,  their  feet  should  form 
a  triangle  with  open  points  of  two  inches  brocd.  In  this  position 
they  receive  the  precaution,  . 


\m  ' 


:  vj  ■ 


f>    V  * 


H 


40 


IflBST  PAINCIFXES  OF 


•Attention. 
1.  At  this  word  the  eyes  are  thro^vn  briskly  to  the  front 
without  moving  the  body.    If  the  ofRcer  requires  it,  a  fugleman 
advances  far  enough  in  front  to  be  seen  without  difficulty  by  the 
whole  company,     ".'rv.;.;     .  '     •'  ,      ■'  '"■  ■     •  ■'--■  i  '•- 

Advance  arms.  ■'  .'■'■•        '    ^'" 

The  right  hand  seizes  the  rifle  at  the  swell,  raises  and  brings 
it  to  the  position  called  the  advance  in  infantry  exercise ;  that  is, 
the  right  hand,  with  the  two  first  fingers  under  the  guard,  and 
the  thumb  over  the  guard ;  the  third  and  fourth  fingers  behind 
the  slock,  so  that  the  cock  may  rest  upon  the  two  lateral  fingers ; 
the  right  arm  hangs  at  ease,  not  so  much  as  to  incline  the  body ; 
and  yet  so  free  that  it  may  be  sunk  two  inches  if  required ;  the 
left  arm  hangs  at  ease  with  the  fingers  extended,  so  that  the 
middle  finger  may  feel  the  seam  of  the  breeches.  The  barrel 
of  the  rifle  rests  in  a  perpendicular  position  against  the  shoul- 
der, and  the  but  pressing  gently  against  the  thigh. 
The  company  will  prepare  to  load. 

Riflemen  must  be  at  first  accustomed  to  make  ready  and  take 
aim,  methodically,  and  thoroughly  practised  in  it ;  because  they 
are  seldom  in  a  situation  in  action  to  fire  by  word  of  command. 

The  officer  will  now  order  out  the  fugleman,  if  he  thinks  fit, 
and  then  caution  the  company  to  wait  for  the  words  of  command. 

On  which  the  fugleman  (if  any)  steps  forward ;  if  the  loading 
is  to  be  with  cartridge,  it  will  be  so  ordered ;  if  with  loose  pow- 
der, the  word  will  be,    ,         .  ,.    ,         ,  J,   , 
Prime. 

1 .  The  rifle  is  thrown  by  the  right  hand  into  the  position  of 
the  recover  in  battalion  exercise,  and  held  with  the  right  hand 
at  the  small ;  the  left  hand  in  front  of  the  swell,  gently  support- 
ing the  rifle  in  its  perpendicular  position. 

2.  Quarter  face  to  the  right,  a  segment  of  about  four  inches 
from  the  parade  front,  and  at  the  same  moment  the  rifle  is 
brought  down  by  the  side,  the  muzzles  in  a  range  something 
above  horizontal ;  the  but  resting  against  the  right  hip ;  the  left 
palm  supporting  the  rifle  at  the  swell ;  the  right  thumb  is  placed 
against  the  hummer,  tlie  hand  with  the  knuckles  upward,  and 
the  right  elljow  close  to  the  but ;  the  lock  inclining  a  little  to- 
Hard  the  body  to  receive  the  priming. 


bod 

resf 

thel 


MtriE  DISOiniNC. 


41 


to  the  front 
it,  a  fugleman 
fficulty  by  the 


Jill 


ses  and  brings 
Tcise ;  that  is, 
he  guard,  and 
fingers  behind 
ateral  fingers ; 
;Une  the  body ; 
required;  the 
;d,  so  that  the 
5.  The  barrel 
inst  the  shoul- 


1. 


M     J     V'f" 


ready  and  take 
t ;  because  they 
•d  of  command, 
if  he  thinks  fit, 
ds  of  command. 
I;  if  the  loading 
with  loose  pow- 


t  the  poMtion  of 
the  right  hand 
gently  support- 
bout  four  inches 
lent  the  rifle  is 
»nge  something 
;ht  hip ;  the  left 
thumb  is  placed 
les  upward,  and 
lining  a  little  to- 


t  i 


I 


3.  The  hammer  is  pushed  up  bf  the  right  thumb ;  the  right 
hand  seizes  the  cartridge  with  the  three  first  fingers. 

4.  The  cartridge  is  brought  to  the  mouth,  and  the  end  twisted 
6ffwith  the  teeth. 

5.  The  priming  is  then  shaken  into  the  pan,  with  the  thumb 
and  first  and  second  fingers ;  the  pan  is  shut  by  the  third  and 
fourth  fingers ;  and  the  right  hand  slides  behind  the  cock)  and 
holds  the  small  of  the  stock  freely. 

1 .  The  rifle  is  gently  canted  in  front  of  the  body  by  the  right 
hand,  the  but  is  brought  to  the  ground  between  the  two  feet,  by 
sliding  gently  through  the  left  hand,  barrel  to  the  front. 

2.  The  left  hand  seizes  the  rifle  near  the  muzzle,  the  thumb 
stretched  along  the  stock;  the  but  is  placed  between  the  feet, 
the  barrel  and  stock  at  the  swell  between  the  knees ;  the  powder 
is  put  into  the  barrel,  and  the  wa</  entered;  the  ramrod  is  seized 
with  the  fore  finger  and  thumb  of  the  right  hand,  the  back  of 
the  hand  towards  the  body. 

3.  The  ramrod  being  drawn  out  by  the  right  hand,  the  left 
quits  the  rifle,  and  grasps  the  ramrod  the  breadth  of  a  hand 
from  the  end,  the  head  of  which  is  then  sunk  about  an  inch  into 
the  barrel. 

4.  The  wadding  being  forced  down  with  both  hands,  the  ram- 
rod is  drawn  and  returned,  and  the  rifle  is  seized  by  the  right 
hand  below  the  left.  The  right  hand  brings  the  rifle  across  the 
body  to  the  right  shoulder  in  the  advanced  position,  when  the 
left  hand  is  drawn  briskly  away. 


Beady. 


,JMm» 


The  rifle  is  brought  to  the  recover  as  in  battalion  firing. 

Quarter  face  to  the  right,  throw  the  rifle  gently  into  a  hori 
zontal  position  to  the  front,  and  let' it  fall  upon  the  palm  of  the 
left  hand  at  such  a  distance  only  as  will  give  easy  support ;  bring 
the  soal  of  the  but  into  the  hollow  of  the  right  shoulder,  and  at 
the  same  instant  the  right  foot  is  thrown  about  eighteen  inches 
behind  the  left,  the  left  knee  rather  bent,  not  stifij  but  firm  ;  the 
body  inclined  well  forward ;  the  neck  bent  so  that  the  right  check 
rests  on  the  but,  the  left  eye  closed,  and  the  right  glancing  ;iIong 
the  barrel,  takes  aim  through  the  sight ;  the  right  hand  grasps 


'■' 


> '  1 1 1' 


:tl(U 


^2 


FIRST  PRINCIPLBS  •! 


it 


II 


the  piece  at  the  small,  whik  ht  fote  finger  is  placed  on  the 
trigtjer.  As  soon  as  the  rifleman  has  fixed  on  his  ol}ject,  he 
fires.  In  exercise  he  fires  at  the  word  only,  uniil  well  practised 
in  the  firing  motions ;  but  as  soor  as  perfect  he  fires  without 
waiting  for  the  word  of  command.  ,,  ,i:t<ij  .\  : 

As  soon  as  the  rifle  is  fired,  it  is  brought  to  the  priming  po- 
sition,  ui;less  the  word  recover  be  given,  or  the  bugle  signal  to 
cease  Jiringy  which  is  t  >  be  considered  as  a  command  to  recover 
arms  and  fuUf  cocky  which  is  followed  by  ,.    ;,       ,. ,     , 


Advance  arma. 


u\\ 


'.".r 


This  motion  is  the  advance  of  the  battalion  exercise-  At  the 
same  moment  that  the  right  foot  is  brought  to  its  first  position, 
witii  the  right  hand,  brmg  the  rifle  briskly  from  the  recover 
to  the  right  side ;  the  fingers  going  at  the  same  instant  under 
the  guard ;  the  thumb  over  the  guard  i  the  left  hand  keeps  an 
easy  hold  of  the  rifle  and  aids  in  crossing  the  body  with  the 
rifle  till  it  is  placed  in  the  proper  position,  the  hollow  of  the 
shoulder.  .-    r  i   ,;  *:  .      .1 

0rAer.,.,arm8,  1. 1..;   .     !>;-.•  r;  ♦ 

Seize  the  rifle  with  the  left  hand  briskly  across  the  body  even 
with  the  shoulder,  raising  it  aijout  two  inches  wii>.  the  right' 
hand,  which  is  then  disengaged  from  the  guard  below,  and  grasp 
the  rifle  firmly  round  the  muzzle.  The  left  hand  is  then  dis- 
engaged and  brought  to  its  former  position  on  the  left  thigh ; 
while  with  the  righi,  the  rifle  but  is  brought  to  the  ground  in  a 
line  wi'.h  the  point  of  the  right  foot.  The  Mrist  gracefully  bent 
and  Uie  elbow  easily  pressing  the  rifle  against  the  body ;  the 
right  hand  is  hen  thrown  in  front  of  the  rifle,  the  fingers  ex- 
tended straight  downwards,  the  thumb  behind  the  barrel. 

Riflemen  are  never  required  to  fire  with  cartridges  but  when 
actihg  in  « lose  order,  which,  though  it  often  happens,  is  not 
precisely  their  province  in  acUon.  Whenever  it  is  practicable^ 
riileiiien  will  load  with  powder  measure  and  luuse  ball.  They 
must  be  first  taught  to  loud  and  fire  with  cartridge  like  infantry ; 
after  which  the  principal  instructions  for  recruits  will  be  how  to 
load  with  loose  bali,  and  to  fire  at  the  target. 


I  \ 


IIFLE  DlSCIPLimS. 


43 


iced  on  the 
s  ol}ject,  he 
ell  practised 
res  without 


W I 


r  in 


priming  po« 

le  signal  to 

id  to  recover 


ise.  At  the 
irst  position, 
the  recover 
nstant  under 
nd  keeps  an 
ady  with  the 
lollow  of  the 


he  body  even 
iCt  the  right 
}W,  and  grasp 
1  is  then  dis- 
te  left  thigh; 
e  ground  in  a 
racefuUy  bent 
he  body ;  the 
le  fingers  ex- 
bur  rel. 

Iges  but  when 
ippens,  is  not 
is  practicable, 
e  ball.  They 
like  infantry ; 
will  be  how  to 


•t 


§  3.  PRACTICE  PraiNG. 

The  firings  of  rifle  corps  may  be  divided  upder  three  heads: 
Jixed  or  standing  fire— advancing-^retreatinif. 

Fixed  or  standing  fire  is  practised  not  by  platoons,  nor  in 
ranks,  as  in  battalion,  but  in  a  mode  peculiar  to  the  uses  of  rifle- 
men,  and  calculated  to  obviate  the  disadvantages  discovered  in 
platoon  firing. 

When  the  recruits  are  sufficiently  perfect  in  firing  by  the  dis- 
tinct  and  separate  words  of  commani,  they  should  be  accus- 
tomed to  go  through  the  firings  with  the  following  words  of 
command  only:  .' ,  - 

•Attention. 


■fM' 


•.T'lj.rj 


Fire, 


No  single  motion  should  be  omitted  in  the  firing  exercises, 
as  it  is  of  more  consequence  that  a  rifle  should  be  properly  than 
expeditiously  loaded. 

Half  cock,  '  '  ■ 

The  rifle  is  brought  to  the  recover,  and  half  cocked. 

•    8hutpan.  ! 

This  mot'on  is  executed  in  the  position  of  the  recover.  '■' 

TraiL,„ami8,  •  •         '''  "'■' 

The  rifle  is  thrown  handsomely  into  the  right  hand  to  the 
right  side,  caught  at  the  swell;  and  the  arm  lowered  to  its 
length  without  straining ;  the  rifle  is  held  balanced  upon  the 
four  fingers,  the  muzzle  as  high  as  the  breast,  but  direct  to  the 
front.. ..the  hand  by  the  right  side. ...elbow  slightly  bent. 

0rder.„.arm8. 

The  right  hi>iid  performs  thi^  motion,  by  gently  but  briskly 
throwing  the  lifle  into  a  perpendicular  position,  in  a  line  with 
the  point  of  the  right  foot,  and  there  gently  suffering  the 
vreight  of  the  rifle  to  bring  the  but  to  the  ground... -the  fingers 
thrown  in  front,  the  thumb  behind  the  barrel,  the  arm  gently 
bent. 

After  the  young  rifleman  has  perfected  himself  in  the  fore- 
going parts  of  discipline)  he  must  be  constantly  taught  firing  at 


i 


■"Vi 


j^   y«  -A. 


t  f 


H 


i 

Ml 


■■■:  \  : 


■1   :, 


'1 1 


li 


Vl&ST  PIUNCIPI.£it  OF 


a  target,  >vhich  should  be  at  least  five  feet  diameter.  If  smaller, 
the  unpractised  man  would  be  at  first  discouraged,  as  some  may 
miss  it  at  first ;  it  is  also  necessary  to  have  it  so  large  that  the 
range  of  the  rifle  may  be  known  whether  it  throws  the  ball  to 
the  right  or  to  the  left ;  and  if  it  were  too  narroWi  he  could  not 
ascertain  this.  A  target  of  proper  Mze  and  painted  in  circles, 
is  easily  hit,  the  rifleman  sees  the  fault  he  has  made,  and  learns 
to  correct  it.  He  must  be  taught  to  fire  at  a  target  without  a 
rest,  for  if  he  accustoms  himself  to  make  use  of  a  support,  he 
ivill  rarely  fire  true  without  one ;  but  as  this  method  will  be 
rendered  easy  by  practice,  he  should  begin  by  firing  at  fifty 
yards  distance,  and  increase  it  by  degrees  to  100,  150,  200,  and 
300  yards. 

Many  of  the  Pennsylvania  rifle  corps  practise  firing  as  they 
advance  in  single  file,  in  the  following  manner :  A  hat,  or  any 
other  object  of  similar  size,  is  placed  on  a  staff  or  fence  post, 
four  or  five  feet  high.  The  rifle  company  are  fornied  into  In* 
^ian  file,  and  are  put  into  the  short  pace  of  the  Indian,  with  the 
rifle  at  the  horizontal  trail.  They  pass  the  object  in  a  circle, 
leaving  it  on  iheir  left  and  firing  successively  as  they  pass  in 
that  direction.  They  move  in  a  circular  course,  and  after  firing 
a  number  of  rounds,  they  are  faced  to  the  right  about,  and  pass 
and  fire  at  the  object  on  their  right  side.  The  firing  from  the 
right  is  from  a  halt ;  the  firing  from  the  left  is  practised  with- 
out halting. 

The  rifleman  must  be  made  acquainted  with  the  nature  of 
sights,  and  the  aim  of  the  rifle  j  how  to  load  with  loose  ball,  to 
force  it  dextrously  into  the  barrel,  so  that  it  shall  lie  close  upon 
the  powder  without  bruising  the  grains;  he  must  be  taught 
how  to  use  the  plaistery  which  is  a  piece  of  greased  flannel,  fus- 
tian, or  soft  leather,  to  facilitate  the  passage  of  the  ball  into  the 
barrel,  and  clean  it.  '*'    '■   ■■•"•''•''•'^* 

He  must  be  taught  to  mark  every  shot  fired  at  the  target 
Mhich  strikes  it,  and  to  observe  whether  it  be  pointed  too  high 
or  too  low.. ..too  much  to  the  right  or  to  the  left,  so  that  he  may 
correct  his  fire  accordingly.  He  should  weigh  his  powder,  and 
jiote  the  difference  of  effect  with  a  greater  or  less  quantity  of 
jiowder,  and  how  far  the  quantity  of  the  powder  affects  the  shot. 
The  officers  of  rifle  corps  should  be  as  expert  as  the  privates, 
and  should  be  competent  to  instruct,  as  well  as  correct  error. 


Bins  DISCIPLINE. 


4S 


If  smaller, 

some  may 

e  that  the 

the  ball  to 

could  not 

in  circles, 

and  learns 

without  a 

upport,  he 

lod  will  be 

ag  at  fifty 

0^  200,  and 

ng  as  they 

lat,  or  any 

fence  post, 

ed  into  In- 

Q,  with  the 

in  a  circle, 

ley  pass  in 

after  firing 

It,  and  pass 

ig  from  the 

:tised  with- 

e  nature  of 
)ose  ball,  to 
close  upon 
be  taught 
nannel,  fus- 
)all  into  the 

the  target 
:d  too  high 
hat  he  may 
towder,  and 
quantity  of 
ts  the  shot, 
le  privates, 
Tect  erroi*. 


i 


The  proper  charge  of  the  rifle  must  be  particularly  attended  to ; 
a  measure  provided  to  contain  nn  exact  charge,  attached  to  his 
powder  flask.  And  riflemen  must  be  practised  to  load  and  to 
fire  as  they  lie  on  the  ground,  and  to  fire  from  behind  trees  and 
stone  fenceS;  and  in  every  species  of  covered  g^und. 

„    $4.  OF  FIRING  ON  THE  SPOT. 

In  the  c1o«e  and  extended  order,  the  ranks  fire  dternately,  it 
being  a  rule,  that  the  whole  are  never  to  be  unlov  dfd  at  the  same 
time.  -r'j-  ( 

The  signal  being  given  to  fommmr^'^mtjr,  the  field  oflic'^rs 
and  stair,  retire  to  the  rear  ;  the  subalterns  remain  in  the  line  ; 
the  captain  or  first  lieutenant  always  on  the  right. 

In  close  order,  the  senior  officer  in  the  rear  of  the  company  or 
division  which  is  ordered  to  fire,  gives  the  word. 

On  the  signal  for  commencing  ^ring  being  given,  the  two  right 
hand  files  of  each  platoon  or  section,  according  as  the  company 
may  be  told  off,  are  immediately  to  take  three  paces  to  the  front ; 
the  two  in  their  rear  stepping  to  the  right  of  their  file  leaders, 
and  each  take  aim  and  fire  ;  come  about  by  the  left  and  resume 
their  positions ;  and  so  on  through  the  whole  company. 

This  mode  of  discipline  is  necessary  to  prevent  the  whole  from 
being  unloaded  at  the  same  time  ;  and  the  uniformity  and  con- 
tinuity of  fire  are  thus  made  incessant.  When  it  is  required 
that  the  firing  should  ceasej  the  signal  of  the  bugle  previously 
determined  for  that  purpose,  is  given  ;  and  after  this  not  a  shot 
should  be  heard  fired. 

The  oflicer  must  remsdn  invariably  in  the  line  during  this 
firing,  and  on  no  account  to  stir  from  the  spot.    When  the 
signal  for  ceasing  fire  is  given,  and  every  man  loaded  and  shoul' 
dercd  (or  at  the  advance)  the  oflicers  di'eas  their  platoons. 
tAttention,  ^ 

At  this  word  the  right  hand  file  (that  is  the  man  on  the  right 
in  the  font  rank,  and  the  man  on  the  right  of  the  rear  i*ank)  of 
each  platoon,  take  three  quick  paces  forward  and  halt,  the  rear 
roan  steps  out  ten  inches  to  the  right  of  his  file  leader,  but  on  a 
line  with  his  own  position. 

When  he  has  fired,  he  quits  his  hold  with  the  right  hand, 
lind  in  fiicing  to  the  left  about;  swings  the  rifle  in  an  horizontal 


:  '( 


'A-i\ 


^  * 


h 


46 


TIRST  PRIIVCIPLBS'OF 


■■;   \! 


;/: 


'     I^J 


(hjO'h'An  AOKf:    t'./'eaif)    J/ti;.! 


position  with  the  barrel  downwards,  and  steps  briskljr  into  his 
ori|rinal  position  in  the  rank,  and  fronting  by  the  left  about,  he 
brings  the' rifle  into  the  position  of  prime  and  load ;  half  cocks, 
and  proceeds  to  load,  going  through  the  motions  as  before  with- 
out further  word  of  command,  -iirtjrjf.  r.-ynhi  huu  .H'jf-ni.  sd-ji--: 
The  practice  of  exercise  of  rifle  corps  is  usually  regulated  by 
the  bugle  horfiy  for  which  there  are  certain  staves  of  musical 
notes  within  the  Compaq's  of  that  instrument,  determined  by  the 
commanding  officer  to  be  the  signals  for  performing  or  ceasing 
to  perform  the  several  parts  of  discipline.  A  scheme  for  this 
purpose  is  annexed  to  this  work  in  musical  notes,  £(nd  new  sig- 
nals may  be  ea&ily  added.      ;.j,     ,.,,    ;  i.s-,T7>!JUl  5.;«'Jf   t>-fih:  ):: 

§  5.  ANOTHER  METHOD.      '  ,'      ' 

As  soon  a&  the  rifleman  is  perfect  In  the  flrings,  he  is  in- 
structed in  the  signals  by  the  bugle,  so  that  he  may  know  when 
to  commence  or  cease  firuig. 

Front  raiik....ready...,aim. 
'  The  fire  may  commence  from  right  or  left,  and  continue  to 
the  opposite  end  of  the  rank ;  each  loading  after  his  fire ;  as 
soon  as  half  a  rank  has  fired  the  word  is  given  ;  and  they  then 
continue  to  Are  with  deliberation,  loaduig  carefully,  and  firing 
without  perturbation. 

Eear  rank.f.,ready....aim. 

Every  man  selects  his  separate  object,  and  fires  at  his  own 
discretion ;  when  he  has  loaded,  he  touches  his  front  rank  man 
as  a  signal  for  him  to  do  the  same  ;  and  as  soon  as  the  front 
rank  man  has  fired  and  loaded,  the  rear  rank  man  fires  agMn ; 
and  thus  the  fire  is  kept  up  briskly,  but  without  hurry  or  con- 
fusion, until  they  cease  Jiring. 

This  method  is,  by  some,  considered  preferable  to  another 
whicli  has  been  practised  by  some  corps,  of  moving  a  few  files 
forward,  noted  as  a  matter  of  discipline  in  the  preceding  sec- 
tion ;  as  in  this  mode  the  line  is  preserved  in  better  order  and 
the  impression  is  greater.  But  both  are  proper  in  suitable  cir- 
cumstances. 

In  extended  order  the  signal  to  commence  Jiring  being  made, 
the  front  rank  begins  without  waiting  for  the  word  from  the 
eflicer ;  but  the  men  observe  the  same  rules  of  alternate  firing 
and  loading  as  in  closed  ranks. 


'v.      tflrja  !v»|J6l.>iIi^<  ^llCJii 


■:  (■. 


•ill 


RIFIX  DISCIFLINS. 


«!r 


Aj  into  his 
t  about,  he 
half  cocks, 
lefore  with- 

:gulated  by 
of  musical 
ined  by  the 
;  or  ceasing 
ne  for  this 
[id  new  sig- 


i,  he  is  iji- 
know  when 

J  galfi  Jin:,- 

continue  to 
!iis  fire ;  as 
id  they  then 
',  and  firing 

at  his  own 
It  rank  n^an 
as  the  front 
(ires  again ; 
.irry  or  con- 

to  another 
g  a  few  files 
eceding  sec- 
:r  order  and 
suitable  cir- 

being  made, 
■d  from  the 
ernate  firing 


.innliv.iVii, 


CHAP.  V.     w  , 


. .» 


FORMATION  OF  THE  COMPANY.  ' 

§  1 .  IT  now  becomes  necessary  to  treat  of  the  order  of 
depth.  The  company  being  drawn  up  in  single  rank,  as  usual, 
and  the  parade  being  dressed  and  steady,  the  whole  ranked  and 
sized,  as  in  Chap.  II.  receive  the  precaution : 

Attention,     '  *  '"     *     ' 

The  company  will  prepare  to  exercise  in  double 

FILES. 

Tell  off. 

One,  two. ...One  two.  .  .■:.  ,        , 

The  right  hand  man  speaks  cut  in  a  clear  quick  voice,  one, 
the  second  /w^',  the  third  one,  the  fourth  ^wo....and  so  on  to  the 
left. 

The  order  of  formation  is,  that  the  tallest  men  shall  be  on  the 
right  and  left  of  the  rank,  and  that  the  files  of  the  rear  rank 
shall  be  successively  taller  than  those  of  the  same  file  in  front ; 
this  must  be  accomplished  in  a  soldierly  manner. 

A  moment's  reflection  will  show  that  if  the  files  be  now  form- 
ed out  of  the  company,  ranked  and  sized  from  the  flanks  to  the 
centre,  the  common  way,  that  the  men  of  the  front  rank  on  the 
left  half  of  the  company,  will  be  taller  than  the  men  in  their 
rear,  while  the  contrary  will  be  the  case  on  the  right ;  it  will  be 
necessary  to  obviate  this  by  a  more  accurate  method.  The 
company  being  told  off,  the  centre  is  found,  and  the  following 
instructions  and  commands  will  be' given  : 

The  company  will  wheel  into  double  Jilea  from  the  centre 
outward  ;  the  odd  files  will  in  this  movement  be  the  pivots  of 
the  right  half  platoon  ;  the  even  files  the  pivots  of  the  left  half 
platoon  ;  so  that  when  the  words.. ..r/^-A?  and  lejl^  are  given,  the 
even  files  of  the  left  half  platoon  face  to  the  left,  and  the  odd 
files  of  the  right  half  platoon  face  to  the  right.  They  receive 
the  precaution  : 


V    \ 


'I  III', 


rn 


I  1    I 


tU 


I II 


i; 


48 


VIRST  PRINCIFLK8  0> 


•A^tenfion. 


Take  cark  to  wheel  into  double  files  from  the 
centre  outward. 

Mark  time, 

Section8,...hyJile8..,. 

Right  and  left.„.ouhjoard.,:Wlieel,  ^,,^ 

■  This  will  be  the  disposition  at  the  word  right  and  left ;  at  the 
word  vtheeli  they  will  present  this  disposition :  i  .  .^ 


s  s  «  s  s  s 

«  S  S  S  £  S 


3  3  S  3  S  3 
3  3  3  3  3  3 


Thereupon  they  will  receive  the  word,       *  ' 

Front  face. 
And  they  will  present  this  disposition : 

islfflflffMNIfltfflflflffM 
ffttfliffltttffttttffftff 

This  position  places  the  two  sections  with  an  interval:  t« 
bring  the  rank  to  consistency,  they  must  be  closed  to  their  pro- 
per distance  by  the  side  step. 

;  By  the  side  step,  ;  .  >.m   '  i     .;  h 

''  '   To  the  centre..»close  Jile8»..march,    -v  >  -      ^^  .    t 

''  This  is  performed  by  lifting  the  left  foot,  moving  that  foot 
on  the  side  towards  which  the  file  closes  six  inches  at  a  time. 
Thus  the  files  on  the  right  step  six  inches  to  the  left,  and  bring 
the  right  foot  close  up  to  the  left ;  the  files  on  the  left,  step  six 
inches  to  the  right  and  bring  up  the  left  foot. 


§  2.  The  company  is  now  formed  in  double  file  faced  to  the 
front,  and  it  is  necessary  to  put  it  in  motion. 

They  present  the  following  disposition ;  and  are  put  in  mo* 
tion  in  the  same  manner  as  in  single  file.  The  principal  dif- 
ference in  modern  discipline  is,  the  care  that  is  required  in 
making  all  wheelings  upon  the  principle  of  the  /livot,  by  which 


•>  \ 


•'ROM  THE 


3 
eft ;  at  the 


nterval:  tf 
3  their  pro- 


g  that  foot 
I  at  a  time. 
:,  and  bring; 
:ft,  step  six 

teed  to  the 

put  in  mo« 
incipal  dif- 
equired  in 
)  by  which 


BIFL£  DISCIFIIITB. 


h» 


is  to  be  understood,  that  every  man  who  is  at  the  point  upon 
which  a  wheel  is  to  be  made,  is  called  the  pivot ;  and  so  must 
every  man  be,  whatever  be  the  number  of  men  in  the  rank, 
section,  or  platoon,  above  one.  This  will  be  exemplified  in 
the  two  views  of  a  wheel  to  the  right. 

A\XenXion* 

Thb  company  will  take  cabe  to  wheel  to  the 

RIGHT. 

''    Mark  time....        \^  .-^    ^   , ,_  ,  ^,  ^^   ' ^  ^.  ,. 

The I'ight....     ,.       ! ,.  ,    "  ,,,;;,.   ,. 

This  word  is  to  the  single  man  on  the  head  of  the  cohimn, 
and  on  the  right,  the  word  of  execution  ;  he  must,  as  is  repre^ 
sented,  face  to  the  right,  while  all  the  rest  wait  for  the  word 


.  Wml. 


Iit1»i:fi>  Qi  u 


'  i  !    ■>■  • 


r.<.j 


fcV 


3 8 S S 3 3 S S S  8^  '    ' 
33333  33  3311    ^-';;^ '-^-^  ^^: 

Upon  this  word  the  mian  who  had  faced  steps  out,  and  his  left 
hand  man  wheels  up  on  his  left  side  ;  and  so  every  right  hand 
man,  on  coming  to  the  same  ground  on  which  the  first  man 
stood;  fav  3  briskly  to  the  right,  and  marks  time  a  pace  till  his 
comrac''H  .  :k  left  gains  the  same  front  by  a  wheel  on  his 
left;  the .  i.;",!,  dress  and  advance.  The  following  figure  ex- 
emplifies the  operation  of  the  wheel,  conformably  to  this  rule. 

The  ofiicer  will  signify  that  all  the  movements  now  are  to  be 
made  in  two  ranks  or  double  files ;  and  that  the  intimation  of 
double  JiUsy  will  now  cease  to  be  used. 

Uig1tt...,wheel. 
}■'■'  Fanvard...,mareh. 


.)!••         W. 


if  ••! 


■  . .              t    .'  ■ 

■; ,  J 1  •;^, 

•     ,.'•"'"  '•■  •»!/ 

arch.         •         i  '  *^ 

"t.        : 

'       i.'    !.i      (       'ij't.'l 

■          " 

i:/c'i,ii'}    ;w 

33333     ^ 
3  3  3  3  3  M^ 

J  •■ »     '' 

^•m 

It  r 

•:•.'     1.    lH'i 

» ifi>          i|            ••  •• 

.■        'U 

■  1       'u'xm 

'•    MM 

.   ,,      Jill    '    'Mi-         »»    »» 

,     .     1  [ 

......     •;  =  -! 

|,;..    i-f.,    A!      ,--       if    If 

'.ii 

r    ■    .          yj. 

...  V,-*                 '     II  W 

,•.'!,;.. 

:..     ••j:; 

tf,,.:V    ;..'     !  .  ,^     II  II 

■•  J.. '    .^  »♦  '• 

i 


m 


H 


FIB9T  FBHromiSS   OF 


\       V 


n    f? 


$  3.  After  the  young  riflemen  are  sufficiently  exercised  in 
marching)  wheeling,  and  shooting  with  cartridge,  and  then 
with  loose  powder  and  bdl,  in  small  sections,  they  are  formed 
into  companies  in  two  ranks,  and  told  off  by  the  voice  in  the 
same  manner  as  infantry,  and  they  are  taught  the  duties  to  be 
performed  in  larger  bodies.. ..extending  front....advancing.... 
retreating....closing  either  in  front  or  a  flank  file... .or  firing  in 
their  position.  '•    ^  "'    "  '     •" ' 

The  file  may  extend  from  right,  left,  or  centre,  according  to 
circumstances,  in  any  number  of  paces,  and  of  which  the  com- 
manding officer  must  be  the  judge.  When  in  two  ranks  the 
men  of  the  rear  rank  conforiQ  to  |he  movements  of  their  file 
leaders. v- ■■  ^    V:-r  .i.-- 

The  usual  distance  of  extended  order  is  one  or  two  paces, 
according  to  the  front  to  be  covered  and  the  number  to  cover 
theiii.  If  it  be  required  to  extend  to  a  greater  distance,  either 
to  cover  the  front  of  a  corps,  to  mask  a  manoeuvre,  or  any  other 
purpose,  it  is  intimated  by  the  officer  before  the  signal  is  given 
for  performing  it. 

In  extending  to  a  flank,  upon  a  signal  or  word  of  command  for 
that  purpose,  the  whole  face  to  that  flank  except  the  first  or 
last  file,  and  step  off  in  quick  time  with  arms  trailed;  the  front 
rank  being  well  closed  up,  and  the  rear  rank  looking  over  the 
left  shov'^df^r  in  order  to  halt  their  file  leaders ;  for  on  the  latter 
will  depend  tnat  they  halt  at  the  proper  distance.  The  platoon 
or  company  being  formed  in  close  order,  in  two  ranks,  and  is 
required  to  extend  from  the  right,  and  the  distance  to  open  is 
smalli  the  words  of  command  will  be  given,  preceded  by  the 
order  for  the  aide  ste/if  but  if  the  side  step  is  not  mentioned, 
the  whole  company  excepting  the  right  hand  tile  (that  is  the 
right  hand  man  of  each  rank)  face  to  the  left,  and  the  number 
of  paces  at  the  extension  is  mentioned  at  two  or  more  paces 
distance. 

II  at  iwo  paces,  each  of  the  files  that  are  faced  to  the  left,  step 
out  :ih(>rtly  in  time,  and  casting  an  eye  over  the  right  shoulder, 
measures  with  his  eye  the  two  paces  distant  from  the  file  be- 
hind him.  H'lving  reached  the  point,  they  either  face  sucr.es- 
sively  or  mark  time  and  front  together.  Being  faced  to  the 
front  extended,  the  rear  rank  will  step  out  one  pace  to  the  tight, 
so  that  they  cover  the  interval  of  the  front  rank.    Two  paces  is 


BIFLB  S1SCIPI.71IK. 


61 


more  paces 


the  most  usual  distance  for  the  extent  of  ;ifle  corps ;  the  inter- 
val  affords  the  rear  rank  an  opportunity  to  march  up  and  fire 
without  impediment. 

AVhere  riflemen  are  numerous*  thej  should  be  formed  in 
three  ranks,  and  the  third  rank  composed  of  the  men  most 
expert  at  loading.... the  third  rank  might  in  action  load  for  the 
two  ranks  in  front. 

The  following  will  convey  a  more  distinct  idea  of  the  com> 
pany  at  the  close  and  extended  order.  The  rank  and  file  con- 
sists of  34  men,  drawn  up  two  deep....  12  files  being  in  front. 

12    11    10    9     8     7     6     5     i     S     2     1  '        •.<'•'!»' 

MMf§NMIiilMltttitM./»  tQ'o,''^  ii  jii'f 

To  the  left....extend,  .  : 

At  this  word  all  but  the  right  hand  fileyor^ivof)  step  out  six 
inches  to  the  left,  and  present  the  following  disposition : 

NflfNItttMttMMNliM 
ttfttffffffftfttfltffitfllp 

As  soon  as  the  company  is  perfect  in  extending  with  preci- 
sion, the  extension  may  be  performed  by  signal ;  if  there  be 
no  bugle,  signals  of  another  kind  are  easily  devised  with  the 
drum,  colors*  or  flags. 

Closing  may  also  be  performed  by  word  or  signal,  every  man 
facing  to  the  point  ordered,  and  shouldering  rifles  as  they  come 
up  and  dress.  Care  must  be  taken  at  all  times  that  the  files  do 
not  intermix,  and  that  every  man  knows  and  follows  his  leader. 
See  plates  6  and  7. 

On  the  signal  to  halt,  the  whole  halt  and  dress.  If  the  chain 
is  to  fire,  the  signal  to  commence  ^ring  is  given  ;  on  which  the 
firing  is  carried  on  in  the  mode  prescribed  in  the  preceding  part 
of  this  chapter ;  till  the  signal  is  given  to  ceaaejiring.      ,,i 

§  4.  To  fire  upon  the  spot,  or  by  the  signal,  the  practice  of  some 
corps  is  for  the  right  hand  man  of  each  division  to  advance  three 
paces,  select  his  object,  and  having  fired,  return  to  his  place. 
The  other  three  men  perform  the  same  successively,  and  by 
this  means  the  fire  is  kept  up  without  intermission  as  long  as 
required.  Another  mode  is  for  the  ranks  to  lire  alternately 
advancing  and  retreating  as  when  skirmishing,  two  (.len  of  the 
iVont  rank  of  each  division  of  the  chain  always  moving  together. 


i  I 


W' 


». 


^ 


;  ii 


■> « 


52 


VIKST  PBIMCIPXfiS   Of 


The  rear  rank  steps  two  paces  to  the  right  in  order  to  be 
able  to  fire  between  the  intervals  of  the  first  rank  if  necessarjr* 
and  without  impediment. 

The  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers,  in  giving  com- 
mands  and  signaU?  never  tnove  out  of  their  proper  places ;  they 
are  at  all  times  the  points  upon  which  the  ranks  must  dress. 
In  every  other  respect  the  rules  which  relate  to  firing  in  ad- 
vancing must  be  followed.  ..;,  i;;iKtJ.K. 

When  the  companjr  or  platoon  extends  from  the  leftj  the 

wordisgiven:  ,. ,,  .  .,     ^    :,    .     ,    j  ii     . 

To  the  right....cixiend,  ■   t :  . 

The  whole,  except  the  left  hand  file,  step  six  inches  to  the 

right ;  and  the  rear  rank  acts  as  in  the  corresponding  movement. 

When  the  platoon  extends  from  the  centre,  the  word  is  given : 

^  '    From  the  cc«frre....ca?feiitF.      '  ■  ■'^"     '  *'''''  *^'" 

The  centre  file,  front  and  rear,  stand  steady  ,  the  files  on  the 
right  step  to  the  right ;  those  on  the  left  step  to  the  left ;  as  in 
the  corresponding  movements. 

The  following  shows  the  front  rank  in  close  order,  the  rear 
rank  extended : 


MMffffffft§0iti9 
tt    It    It    It    tf    ft     ft 


<;«!o:?  fi"i 

H 


If  the  platoon  is  extended  at  the  common  open  distance  ot  two 
paces  and  no  more,  the  arms  are  brought  from  the  trail  to  the 
shoulder;  but  if  extended  more  than  two  paces  the  trail  is 
preserved.  . .  ;v..         .       :     • 

Both  ranks  dress,  as  soon  as  they  are  fronted,  by  the  point 
from  which  they  extended  ;  and  the  rear  rank  men  take  half  a 
pace  to  the  right,  if  necessary,  to  fire.  In  marching  to  the  front, 
however,  they  again  cover  correctly  in  the  manner  of  infantry. 

The  charge  ot  the  rear  runk  in  extending  in  this  kind  of  ser- 
vice is  important,  as  should  they  not  halt  their  front  rank  men 
properly  at  a  due  distance,  the  line  may  be  too  extensive,  or 
not  enough  extendec).  Some  parts  may  become  too  weak,  and 
the  design  of  the  conjmanding  officer  may  be  defeated  by  this 
neglect,  or  by  any  periinaciousness  of  a  subordinate  person  in 
deviating  from  the  strict  letter  of  the  order  given.  See  plates 
f),  7,  8,  and  9.  ,     ,, . 


RIFLE    DISCIPLINE. 


53 


At  the  signal  to  retreat^  the  whole  chain  faces  to  the  right 
about  and  retreats  in  ordinary  time.  On  the  signal  to  halt^  the 
whole  chain  halts  and  fronts.  If  the  signal  is  givea  to  ircHne 
to  the  lefty  they  face  to  the  left,  and  take  ground  accordingly  ; 
if  to  incline  to  the  right,  they  obey  the  si^;nal  likewise.  Should 
the  ground  require  it,  or  any  other  proper  cause,  an  oblique 
movement  to  the  right  or  lett  in  such  cases  is  proper.  On  the 
signal  to  close,  the  whole  closes  to  that  point  from  which  the 
signal  is  given. 

Should  the  two  flank  platoons  of  a  corps  be  ordered  to  form 
the  chain,  or  extend  themselves,  as  circumstances  may  require, 
in  order,  by  that  means,  to  mask  the  formation  of  a  battalion,  or 
to  keep  the  enemy  at  a  distance,  in  a  country  where  his  front 
is  difficult  of  approach,  the  two  flank  platoons  will:  vjv  c  in 
quick  time  the  distance  which  may  be  directed)  and  when  ar- 
rived at  the  spot,  the  right  flank  platoc  n  forms  the  chain  to  the 
left,  and  the  left  flank  platoon  to  the  right,  proceeding  according 
to  the  directions  already  given  for  extending  and  forming  the 
chain.  At  the  signal  given  to  close,  the  platoons  close  to  the 
point  from  which  they  extended,  and  both  resume  their  position 
on  the  flank  of  the  corps  as  quickly  as  possible.  See  the  plates. 

The  chain  may  change  in  front,  previously  facing  to  either 
flank,  and  forming  a  new  alignment ;  the  reserves  at  the  same 
time  filing  from  the  right  or  left  to  the  front,  and  taking  up  a 
parallel  position  in  its  rear.    Skirmishers  may  do  the  same. 


m 


§  5.  The  movements  of  riflemen,  it  has  been  observed  before^ 
are  conducted  in  a  method  more  open,  or  in  a  looser  or  more 
extended  order,  than  the  movements  in  the  column  of  attack, 
column  of  march,  or  the  line.  Their  habitual  order  is  in  two 
ranks,  or  files  of  two  deep ;  and  their  distance,  when  not 
manoeuvring  in  the  close  order,  is  36  inches  front  and  depth 
for  each  man.  This  is  their  uniform  parade  distance ;  which 
gives  each  file  a  front  of  three  feet,  and  a  clear  interval  to  each 
file  of  six  inches  on  each  side.  The  distance  of  the  rear  rank 
from  the  front  will  be  two  feet ;  sn  that  the  two  ranks  of  a  rifle 
corps,  or  the  flank  of  a  battalion  formed  in  the  order  of  three 
in  depth,  the  rifle  ranks  will  dress  with  the  fiont  and  rear  rank 
of  the  battalion,  and  50  files  of  riflemen  will  occupy  a  front  of 


£•?<■'■'' 


,'•/ 


u 


JfiKST   PKINCIFLKS   OJi- 


H 


1 
\ 

{ 

:•; 

it 

V- 


(' 


i; 


1 


i^  i 


150  feet ;  ori  18  feet  more  than  the  front  of  two  companies  ot 
infantry  in  the  order  of  three  deep ;  and  equal  to  one  third 
more  than  the  front  of  a  company  of  infantry  two  deep.        .  <  </ 

The  officer  will  always  have  a  discretion  in  so  arranging  the 
distance  of  ranks,  an  well  as  the  position  of  riflemen  on  paradei 
as  well  as  on  service ;  and  it  is  the  duty  of  the  rifle  officer  to 
obey  such  dispositions  promptly ;  no  corps  requires  more 
implicit  and  prompt  obedience  to  orders^  than  rifle  corps  ;  the 
fate  of  a  battle  so  much  depends  on  this  species  of  troops,  that 
they  should  never  be  unprepared....never  suffer  a  surprize  ; 
and  their  actions  should  resemble  the  lightning*  the  flash  and 
the  stroke  together)  or  the  stroke  first. 

All  their  movements  should,  therefore,  be  quick,  they 
should  also  be  short  and  by  the  most  direct  route  to  the  ob- 
ject;  for  which  reason  it  is  particularly  essential  to  them,  that 
they  acquire  the  diagonal  movements  according  to  the  new 
method ;  they  consist  of  a  simple  change  of  the  position  of  t^e 
body  of  each  individual,  in  a  motion  which  corresponds  with 
the  wheeling  of  the  rank  in  the  ordinary  way.    h  nri  .P      .nU.n 

This  mode  of  movement  is  illustrated  in  the  plates  I.  and  IV. 
fig.  3,  of  each,  and  is  explained  by  the  following  diagrams: 

Let  it  be  supposed  that  a  company  is  required  to  be  brought 
into  a  position  similar  with  that  produced  by  the  yfor(ls....Right 
tvheel  i  instead  of  the  movement  in  rank  in  the  old  mode,  each 
file  quarter  faces  to  the  right,  and  moves  on  a  direct  line  dia- 
gonally, instead  of  circularly,  to  the  point  required. 

The  words  of  command  to  be  given  in  this  care,  are  as  follow : 


•'fj^-.i  !«.  'ii  j,Vi  .- 


i.i'}y  iu  I 


I-:  ' 


attention.       t,. 

The  company  will  fohm  upon  thr  kioht  by  the 

diagonal  movement  to  the  i'kont. 
Mark  time. 

File8,...nght  quarter  face.  *     :       i     ■;'. 

->        Forward  march.  :    . 

Mark  time...front....dres8....halt. 

At  the  word  quarter  facCf  the  company  will  present  this  dis* 
position :  . 


SIVLK  DlflCIVLIini. 


H 


Mnies  ot 
me  third 

• 

ging  the 
n  paradci 
officer  to 
es  more 
>rps  ;  the 
oopsi  that 
surprise  ; 
flash  and 

•  .}•;,•  i' 
ick,  thejr 
o  the  ob- 
Iheni)  that 
>  the  new 
tion  of  the 
tends  with 

I.  and  IV. 

;rams : 
be  brought 
tdi....Right 
node,  each 
ct  line  dia- 

e  as  follow : 

IT  BY    THE 


int  tbis  dls' 


The  following  diagrams  show  the  different  modes  of  wheel- 
ing ;  and  this  new  oblique  method}  fig.  1)  shewa  the  curved 
tine  upon  which  each  file  moves  in  the  old  method ;  fig.  3. 
the  quarter  facing  movement)  shows  the  diagonal  lines  upon 
which  each  file  moves  to  the  point  at  which  it  is  directed  to 
mark  tme...Jront..,.and  drets. 


u;»,.-;,/i.j 


ij  in   fj>»' 


>T 


Fro.  1 


Fig.  2 


'i''iy>  1  •»' 


•VtHl 


a    '. 


.■•  ■( 


•/  ao-i  c"'' 


This  diagonal  movement  enables  riflemen  to  fire,  as  thejr 
come  to  the  required  point,  and  in  succession  ;  so  that  instead 
of  waiting  until  a  whole  rank  is  wheeled,  as  in  the  old  mode,  a 
single  file  may  commence  the  fire  the  moment  it  gains  its 
new  front....an  advantage  which  requires  only  to  be  stated  tv 
be  seen. 


,U- 


§  6.  The  importance  of  this  quarter  and  half  fating  will  be 
perceived  the  more  it  is  studied  and  practised  ;  and  it  is  suscep- 
tible of  application  to  formations  of  every  description.  In  the 
preceding  drills,  the  advancing  by  files  from  the  flanks  of 
companies,  and  by  heads  of  sections,  have  been  illustrated; 
these  evolutions  should  be  now  practised  by  eblique  move- 
ments, or  quarter  facing  and  moving  on  diagonal  instead  of 
curved  lines.  The  plates  I.  and  IV.  in  their  third  dispositions, 
each  show  the  operation.  "...  /      •  ; 

Fig.  I .  represents  the  company  in  two  ranks  as  faced  out- 
wards, all  but  the  front  flank  men  of  each  rank,  who  act  as  the 
pivots. 

Fig.  2.  represents  the  company  as  advancing  to  the  front  by 
the  heads  of  sections.  ' 


% 


FIBST   PBIN01PLE8   OT 


iV 


H 


Fig.  3.  repretcnts  the  company  as  forming  to  the  front  by 
rjuarter  facing  inward,  and  moving  on  the  oblique  line  to  their 
original  position,  in  double  ranks,    f  siti  '$**•-    ■.;.i»/ii   n  ^''^^ 

Retiring  by  the  flanks  is  only  reversing  this  evolution ;  and 
the  movements  into  perpendicular  rank,  or  into  horizontal  rank, 
may  be  formed  in  the  oblique  line. 

The  words  of  command  given  in  these  movements  are  as 
follow. 

Jlttention*  Bl"  ■■'"'■- 

i^    The  company  will  move  from  both  flanks,  by 

^,  DOUBLE  FILES,  TO  THE  BUONT.      '-^-sl^*,    .,   •    , 

From  the  centre....oulwardface,     *,*-""  '"vO' •'• 

The  right  hand  man  and  the  left  hand  man  only  keep  their 
posttions....and  when  the  sections  move  to  the  front,  the  rear 
rank  will  form  the  outward  ranks  in  file. 

When  they  are  to  form  front  again  ihey  receive  the  precaution : 

Take  care  to  form  front  by  oBLiquB  movement 

TOWARD  THE  CENTRE. 

';!./,,- i/i';. .;  ' '  .r.;i-    •  1 


Inward..».quarter  face. 
J}Iarch.,..mark  time....halt. 


I.' 


§  7.  The  next  will  be  movements  from  the  centre.  The 
principle  is  precisely  the  same  here  as  in  the  preceding,  and  is 
illustrated  in  plate  IV. 

The  words  of  command  are  given  in  the  following  form  : 

tlttention. 

The  company  will  advance  by  double  files  froj^ 
the  centre  of  half  platoons. 

To  the  eentre....face.  . . , 

if  ,''10 

The  whole  face  to  the  centre  of  half  platoons,  excepting  only 
the  left  hand  file  of  each  right  section,  and  the  right  hand  file 
of  each  left  section,  who  become  the' pivots,  and  accordingly  do 
not  face  to  the  centre,  but  keep  their  places  faced  to  the  front, 
asinfig.  1.  •,  w"  ^ '.V  ■> /iM  ?•  .:    •ii 

As  soon  as  they  receive  the  word  /orwardi  these  two  centre 
flank  men,  or  pivots,  quarter  Jaw  to  their  outer  flanks,  and  move 
a  pace,  so  as  to  admit  the  rear  rank  files  to  advance  upon  the  same 
front,  and  then  front  with  them,  a&  may  be  seen  in  fig.  I,  plate  4. 


BIFLE  DI8CIFLINB. 


67 


Its  are  as 


Fig.  3,  in  the  same  {rfate,  shows  the  mode  of  fornung  to  the 
front  by  an  oblique  or  quarter  facing,  ami  moving  on  the  diago- 
nal lines,  to  the  same  front  as  the  heads  of  the  columns  of  half 
platoons  previously  formed. 

In  all  movements,  the  light  corps  must  be  accustomed  to 
augment  or  diminish  front  with  rapidity ;  the  rule  with  light 
corps  differing  in  this  particular  from  the  battalion,  that  the  in- 
fantry of  the  line  never  lose  the  tact  or  toucfiy  while  light  infan- 
try move  in  a  looser  order,  and  do  not  so  much  depend  on  the 
touehj  as  on  a  perfect  knowlege  of  this  method  of  movement, 
and  a  practical  habit  of  executing  it ;  a  difference  which  clearly 
shows  that  if  there  ought  to  be  any  difference,  the  discipline  of 
rifle  corps  should  be  more  laboriously  studied  and  practised 
than  that  of  the  infantry. 

Riflemen  must  be  accustomed  to  form  double  flies  from  the 
rank  in  Indian  files,  while  on  the  ma.ch,  and  to  reduce  double 
to  single  files. 

They  must  be  accustomed  to  break  off*  into  sections  from 
double  or  Indian  file,  marching  upon  the  named  flank,  and  to 
either  the  right  or  the  left ;  so  that,  if  a  rank  of  double  files  were 
on  its  march,  the  word  being  given. 

Advance  by  sections  of  ten  nv  the  right.... at 

FORMING  DISTANCE....  ,         . 

Sections  of  (en....t%/it  quarter  face.,.»march. 

In  this  operation  the  first  ten  files  would  pursue  their  course 
as  before,  the  next  ten  files  would  quarter  face  to  the  right,  and 
move  to  a  point  ten  yards,  or  the  front  of  ten  files,  on  the  right 
of  the  first  section,  the  third  section  would  move  to  a  point  tvfeti' 
ty  yards  upon  the  right,  and  so  on  every  section  a  distance  on 
the  right  equal  to  the  front  of  its  depth  or  ten  files ;  the  dispo- 
sition of  the  corps  thus  moving  wpuld  exhibit  the  same  appear., 
ance  as  a  column  of  infantry  of  ten  files  front,  in  open  order, 
faced  to  the  right ;  for  the  left  section  would  then  be  its  head 
in  the  original  order,  in  rank  entire,  the  method  to  be  pureued 
would  be  found  in  the  following  commands.... 

The  whole  will  take  care  to  resume  tjie  ori- 
ginal Disposniox  and  front. 

Jftrrfe  ffmr. 

T 


I     i\ 


■!*". 


1    li 


18  VIRST  PRinCIFLES  OP 

The  right  sections  will  move  by  the  rear  of 

THE    left    section    IN    INDIAN    FILE,    AND    FORM 
UPON  THE  LEFT. 

Left  8ection..,.lcft  quarter  face. 
Upon  your  right  Jile  form  front.,., 
JiIarch.,..dre88..„haU. 

In  all  movements  of  light  troops,  and  particularly  in  those  in 
^vhich  ranks  are  broken,  and  the  order  at  times  reversed,  as  in 
the  above  instance,  much  vrill  depend  upon  the  skill  and  quick- 
ness of  the  Serjeants,  one  of  whom  must  always  place  himself 
at  the  head  of  any  leading  section ;  and  all  sections  must  be 
equalized  without  reference  to  the  Serjeants ;  who  will  lead  one 
or  another  section  as  it  advances ;  but  there  must  always  be  a 
Serjeant  on  the  flank  of  every  company,  unless  when  the  order 
is  reversed,  when  the  Serjeants  must  take  the  lead  of  the  tempo> 
rary  head  of  file  in  section.  The  captain  of  riflemen  must  be 
at  all  times  on  the  right  of  the  leading  flic,  whatever  may  b'  the 
disposition  of  his  company. 

§  8.  DUTIES  AS  UGH  r  INFANTRY. 

The  movements  of  rifle  corps  with  an  army  are  in  advance 
or  on  flanks,  and  in  various  dispositions  analogous  to  the  opera- 
tions of  the  line,  but  in  their  own  peculiar  mode  of  movement. 
On  the  parade  drill  they  learn  the  side  step,  after  the  manner  of 
the  infantry,  by  which  the  rank  or  ranks  are  opened  from  the 
centre  on  either  flank,  or  closed  to  a  flank  or  centre  as  occasion 
may  require.  This  step  is  performed*  if  the  opening  is  to  the 
right,  by  keeping  the  left  foot  firm,  throwmg  the  right  foot  six 
inches  to  the  right,  and  bringing  the  left  foot  close  up  to  the 
heel ;  then  stepping  out  to  the  right  again  with  the  right  foot 
until  the  proper  opening  is  obtained ;  and  so  with  the  left  foot  if 
the  extension  is  to  the  left.  If  the  opening  between  the  files  is 
exceeded  two  feet,  it  is  preferable  to  face  the  men  towanls  the 
points  they  are  to  open  to,  and  from  (hence  from  either  as  they 
reach  the  required  distance,  or  keep  them  at  marked  time  and 
front  them  all  together.  As  tirailleurs  they  extend  to  six  or 
eight  feet  distance. 

The  inspection  and  the  review  of  riflemen  are  conducted  upon 
the  same  principles  as  if  they  were  infantry  of  the  line. 


UIFLE  DISCIPLINE. 


The  method  of  posting  ofiicers  varies  nothing  from  the  in- 
fantry practice,  but  in  the  posting  of  the  ofiicers  in  action ;  the 
reason  of  tliis  is  to  be  found  in  the  peculiar  character  of  the 
troops,  and  its  necessity  is  pointed  out  by  the  more  frequent 
advance  of  the  rifle  corps  in  long  and  extended  lines. 

Each  captain  of  a  company  is  the  point  upon  which  the  se- 
veral companies  must  respectively  regulate  their  movements. 
A  battalion  or  a  strong  body  of  riflemen,  marching  through  a 
country  unattended  by  other  troops,  must  look  to  their  oyrn 
safety.  In  such  circumstances  they  should  pursue  the  mode 
of  march  of  infantry  of  the  line,  by  proceeding  in  orderly  co- 
lumns, preceded  and  Ibllowed  and  flanked  by  detachments,  in 
the  nature  of  advance  guard,  rear  guard,  and  skirmishers,  and 
they  must  take  every  precaution  to  avoid  surprise.  Their 
manoeuvres  on  the  defensive,  if  forced  to  resort  to  it,  should  be 
upon  the  principle  of  infantry;  but  they  should  thi  vr  out 
larger  parties,  and  at  more  numerous  points,  than  is  usual  with 
infantry,  both  to  deceive  the  enemy  by  attacking  in  an  unusual 
manner,  and  because  their  particular  discipline  is  better  cal" 
culated  to  be  impressive  in  that  way  than  in  columns  ot  ma- 
noeuvre. 

In  retreating  across  a  plain,  the  ground,  their  own  force,  and 
the  force  that  attacks,  must  regulate  their  dispositions,  and 
their  success  will  depend  on  the  skill  of  the  commander. 

There  are  various  modes  of  conducting  a  retreat,  in  such 
circumstances.  1.  Inline.  2.  By  double  order  of  files  from 
the  flanks  to  the  rear.  3.  By  the  order  of  four  files  from  each 
flank  to  the  rear :  and,  4.  By  the  various  dispositions  of  the 
hollow  square,  or  the  wedge. 

For  example:  1.  A  regiment  or  battalion  may  advance  in 
line,  halt,  and  the  right  platoons  or  companies  may  fire  in  close 
or  alternate  order,  as  directed.    , 

2.  A  battalion  may  retire  in  line,  halt,  front,  and  fire  by  left 
platoons  in  the  loose  order  or  tirailleur  fire. 

3.  A  battalion  may  break  into  open  columns,  and  Uien  take 
any  position,  in  any  given  mode. 

4.  The  echellon  movements,  always  so  essential  to  light 
troops,  should  be  constantly  practised. 

5.  The  right  and  left  grand  divisions  may  extend,  and  fire 
in  that  order,  and  any  parties  deemed  convenient,  detached  to 


*;J 


il' 


r    V 


!    i 


Hi, 


(" 


I  h'  ( 


<iO 


IISST  PBINClPIiES  OV 


skinnisb,  form  ambuscade,  or  make  reports  of  ground  and  wa- 
ter courses,  close  or  clear  country. 

Rifle  corps,  especially  their  officers,  should  study  with  care 
the  uses  to  which  their  discipline  is  applied,  and  how  they  ap« 
pertain  to  the  line. 

They  should  know  how  to  alter  their  mode  of  march  or  ma- 
neeuvre  with  the  most  ease  to  the  men,  and  with  the  most  ex- 
pertness  in  taking  the  necessary  positions  or  points.  Their 
skill  in  maneeuvring  their  own  corps,  when  moving  in  concord 
with  the  line,  but  not  in  the  line  themselves,  produces  a  beau- 
tiful  effect  in  review,  and  is  very  imposing  aud  useful  in  real 
action.  In  all  other  respects  they  should  acquire  the  steadiness 
and  coolness  of  the  battalion  discipline,  with  the  alacrity  and 
quickness  of  the  light  infantry,  the  patience  of  the  sapper  and 
pioneer,  with  the  intrepidity  and  agility  of  the  backwoodsman. 

§  9.  OFFENSIVE  EVOLUTIONS.     „,  , 

•  Light  troops  act  offensively  in  general,  but  on  special  occa- 
sions defensively.  They  may  also  be  included  in  the  order  of 
battle  in  detached  divisions  or  companies,  or  as  in  the  French 
dispositions  occasionally  as  parts  uf  the  line;  or  they- may  be 
left  wholly  out  of  the  order  of  battle,  and  reserved  for  particular 
auxiUary  services,  for  a  coufi  de  main^  or  for  diverting  the  at- 
tention of  an  enemy  from  the  manoeuvres  of  the  main  army. 

Tht  general  duties  of  light  troops  may  be  simply  stated  un- 
der the  following  heads  t 

1.  To  form  advanced  parties  and  patroles,  where  an  enemy 
is  expected  or  military  movements  apprehended. 

2.  To  occupy  defiles,  and  elevated  positions,  and  prevent 
^;urprises,  or  to  communicate  intelligence  of  the  positions  and 
movements  of  an  enemy. 

.1.  To  annoy  an  enemy  drawn  up  or  moving  in  order  of 
battle,  by  disconcerting  its  movements,  and  depressing  the  ad- 
vanced posts  and  patroles  of  an  enemy. 

•  4.  To  take  an  enemy  in  the  rear  or  on  a  flank  '>y  surprise ; 
and  to  turn  a  flank  by  rapid  and  bold  enterprists  in  action. 

5.  To  harrass  an  advancing  enemy  on  a  march,  seize  maga- 
zines and  convoys. 

6.  To  forage  and  cover  the  movements  of  cavalry  foraging.'; 
parties.      "     ■;••  '       ':  ■  I  '  :f\,     .':■!-'• 


• '?  ,:^^i:;. 


SIXI.E  DISCIPLINE. 


ei 


7.  To  form  ambuscades,  and  other  bold  enterprises. 

8.  To  occupy  bridges  and  passes  in  advancing,  and  to  de* 
stroy  bridges  on  a  retreat. 

9.  To  harrass  an  enemy  on  his  retreat. 

10.  To  rally  from  a  dispersed  order  in  cases  of  exigency, 
and  act  as  solid  columns  or  lines  of  manoeuvre,  like  infantry. 

It  is  a  general  rule  in  relation  to  light  infantry,  that  they  are 
to  act  whenever  required  with  light  cavalry  or  hussars ;  and 
that  the  movements  of  light  infantry  and  light  cavalry  should 
be  co-operative,  and  reciprocal ;  their  services  on  so  many  oc- 
casions being  essential  to  each  other. 

If  the  signal  be  given  them  to  cloaey  the  skirmishers  close  to 
the  position  in  the  reserve,  and  retreat  in  order  to  their  proper 
point ;  from  which,  on  the  second  signal  to  cloacy  they  all  fall 
back  on  the  rear  body  in  good  order,  and  take  the  station  as- 
signed them  in  the  line  or  order  of  battle. 

Should  the  skirmishers  meet  with  a  superior  force,  which 
prevents  their  retreating  in  good  order,  and  according  to  estab- 
lished rules,  they  must  of  course  resort  to  the  most  effective 
expedients  to  make  good  their  junction ;  taking  the  precaution 
to  clear  the  front  of  the  main  body  towards  which  they  are  re- 
treating, in  order  to  render  their  movements  easy  and  more 
secure.  The  moment  the  rifle  corps  clear  a  portion  of  the 
frant  line,  that  portion  fires,  to  cover  their  further  retreat ;  and 
the  whole  line  opens  to  secure  them.  The  arms  of  reserves 
are  usually  either  ordered^  alungy  or  sufi/iortedf  while  those  of 
the  acting  skirmishers  are  usually  ^rat/f(/. 

When  covering  the  front  of  a  line  to  mask  its  movements, 
their  fire  must  be  incessant  and  heavy ;  and,  when  practicable, 
the  whole  of  a  company  should  concentrate  their  fire  on  some 
single  point  of  the  enemy's  line,  so  as  to  make  a  heavy  impres- 
sion, and  thereby  disturb  its  order,  and  divert  attention  from 
the  actual  manoeuvre  thus  intended  to  bo  covered. 


I* 


t\    I     X 


ti 


62 


I-IBST  FRINCIPLES   (^f 


'-'i',  !i  ",  .;■.;, 

',i.'i.'    I't'C 

;■•  >i  '.  J 

y«;'Kl\    ....   , 

.)■■ . 

.->    Ci   I 

CHAP.  \I. 

/    I      . 

.      J    .  1    >  - 

li.. 


i    'r.-t 


$  ».  FORMATION  OF  A  RIFLE  REGIMENT. 


l:t^ 


l\ 


I  1  ik 


!iH:i 


i!   i 


L 


I 


I    I 


I!  ' 


JL  HE  rifle  corps,  for  the  observance  of  ordet  in  military 
arrangement,  shonid  be  organised  on  the  same  principles  as  a 
regiment  of  the  line.  The  French,  who  have  carried  military 
arrangements  to  the  greatest  perfection,  have  half  brigades  of 
riflemen,  vrith  a  grenadier  company  to  each  battalion,  who  act 
as  flankers  to  every  description  of  militai'y  men  on  foot.  This 
organization  is  founded  on  the  power  and  principles  of  emula- 
tion,  and  the  graduated  esfirit  de  corps. 

An  American  rifle  regiment  should  on  this  plan  consist  of 
two  battalions,  or  ten  companies,  on  the  war  establishment, 
consisting  of  one  thousand  men.  Two  of  these  companies 
should  be  select^  and  it  should  be  an  object  of  emulation  in  the 
regiment,  to  be  enrolled  in  these  companies.  The  stafl*  of 
every  description  the  same  as  the  infantry ;  each  company  one 
captain^  one  first,  one  second,  and  one  third  lieutenant  j  t,he  re- 
gimental «tafl'a  colonel,  lieutenant  colonel,  major,  aiul  adjutant. 

A  regiment  is  disposed  according  to  some  established  rule 
of  precedency,  which  is  in  itself  a  matter  merely  arbitrary ; 
but  companies  as  they  join  are  ranged  in  numerical  order  from 
right  to  left ;  and  when  all  on  the  ground,  they  are  counter- 
marched, the  even  companies  by  the  rear,  the  odd  numbered 
companies  by  the  front,  to  their  proper  positions  in  the  ordina- 
tion of  the  regiment.  The  two  battalions  being  formed,  are 
told  oifinto  four  grand  divisions,  excluding  the  two  select  which 
may  be,  at  the  discretion  of  the  commanding  ofiicer,  formed 
into  a  fifth  grand  division  on  the  right  or  left.  In  which  case 
the  compc.iiy  that  belongs  to  the  left  should  be  posted  on  the 
left  of  the  company  that  belongs  to  the  right,  if  marched  to  the 
vight ;  and  the  company  that  belongs  to  the  right,  should  be  on 
the  left  of  the  whole  if  curried  to  ihc  left.  ■ 


M 


RIFLE  DISCIPLIIf£. 


6S 


The  five  grand  divisions  should  be  told  into  ten  sub-divisions, 
and  twenty  platoons,  and  forty  sections ;  but  no  other  sub-divi- 
sion is  necessary  unless  files  of  march,  or  ranks  in  front. 


BATTALION  IN  CLOSE  OBDER. 

._  ,,_  ...  Pioneers. 

...  Staff. 


Bugles.^ A £2  □ 


Music.  S  Si 


a  Lt  Col. 


I A  Serjt  Maj. 
O  Major. 


□  Colonel. 
.  ',  ,        n  Adjutant. 

■"''        '     *   '^  '  ■-'  ^''''  ft  Bugle! 

At  close  order  they  are  formed  in  two  ranks  at  one  pace 
distant. 

In  the  absence  of  the  officers  of  the  first  class,  the  serjeants 
of  companies  take  post  as  follows :  the  senior  serjeant  on  the 
right  of  his  company,  which  is  divided  into  two  half  platoons ; 
one  serjeant  on  the  flank  of  each  front  rank ;  the  remaining 
non-commissioned  officers  on  the  rear  flanks,  supernumeraries 
form  an  extended  rank  in  the  rear,  at  four  paces  distance. 

Captains  and  subalterns  are  present.. ..the  position  of  the 
captain  is  on  the  right  of  his  company,  covered  in  the  rear 
rank  by  a  serjeant.  The  first  lieutenant  on  the  left  of  the 
front  rank,  covered  by  a  serjeant..  .the  serjeants  are  posted 
with  regard  to  merit  in  the  first  instance,  and  where  of  equal 
merit,  according  to  seniority  of  appointment.  The  officers 
commissioned  and  non-commissioned  not  in  the  ranks,  form  a 
separate  rank  extended  at  four  paces  in  the  rear,  when  halted 
or  marching  in  line... .one  pace  only  on  the  right  of  the  line, 
the  serjeants  on  the  left  of  the  column. 

The  field  officers  and  adjutant  are  always  mounted  and  in 
front,  when  engaged  in  firing.. ..the  lieutenant  colonel  ten  paces 
on  the  right  and  front....the  major  ten  paces  on  the  left  and 
front... .the  adjutant  as  aid  to  the  colonel,  and  a  bugle  on  the 
rear  and  right  of  the  colonel.. ..the  serjeant  major  in  the  real' 
of  the  supernumerary  rank  or  on  the  left. 

The  quarter  master,  pay  master,  surgeon,  and  mate.. ..with 
such  artificers  as  may  be  attached  to  ilic  regiment,  are  twelve 


m 


i   1 


if 


mff' 


«4 


VIBST  PBINCIPLSS   Of 


0.  \\ 


■•:  / 


!!  ;'tl 


( 


!  ;  . 


- 


!    ',> 


..  \  i 


paces  behind  the  music.     A  bugler  with  the  colonel  or  com* 
mandant. 


Buglei.  AS2 


Music.    S  S 


b;.ttalion  in  open  order. 
Adjt.  G 


a  Serjt.  Major. 

Pioneers. 


Pioneers. 


Lt.  Col.  D 


O  Major. 
□  Colonel. 

Q  Bugle. 


When  a  regiment  of  riflemen  takes  open  order,  the  field 
officers,  excepting  the  commandant  and  adjutant,  dismount. 
The  captains  advance  two  paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of  com- 
panies, and  the  subalterns  take  post  dressing  in  front  of  their 
respective  platoons,  in  a  rank  with  their  captains.  The  line  of 
ofPcers  is  dressed  by  the  senior  field  officer  on  the  right,  who 
takes  care  to  dress  the  front  rank ;  the  adjutant  takes  care  of 
the  rear  rank  with  the  aid  of  the  serjeant  major. 

The  music  moves  through  the  centre  and  forms  one  pace  in 
front  of  it,  in  rank  entire.  The  buglers  take  post  on  the  right 
of  the  battalion,  unless  otherwise  directed  by  the  field  officers. 

The  artificers  move  into  the  former  position  of  the  music. 

§  3.  GENERAL  RULES  FOR  EVOLUTIONS. 

With  a  view  to  the  operations  of  a  regiment  or  battalion,  it 
is  not  practicable  to  define  with  precision  the  number  of  men 
that  may  be  required  for  a  given  service,  as  it  depends  on  local 
cj^rcumstances  and  the  judgment  of  the  commanding  officer. 
The  same  is  to  be  said  of  the  proper  distance  to  advance. 

It  is  better  generally  to  detach  from  the  flanks,  than  from 
the  centre  ;  the  practice  of  advancing  the  left  or  right  half  pla- 
toons of  companies,  and  thus  leaving  intervals,  is  bad  upon 
principle,  and  ought  to  be  avoided,  though  necessity  may  some- 
timos  authorise  it.  But  the  interval  made  should  not  be  long 
left  open. 

This  evolution  is  required  only  when  the  battalion  or  regi- 
ment is  to  attack,  or  may  have  occasion  to  use  the  whole  of  its 
five  ;  the  skirmishers  tlicrefore  will  not  wait  for  another,  but 


m 


RIFLB   DISCIPLINE. 


« 


will  retire  as  fast  as  is  practicable  through  the  intervals ;  but 
the  quarter  platoons  will  continue  formed,  and  move  with  a 
quick  but  firm  step  to  their  proper  positions.         '  '  *     - ' 

The  officers  of  the  detached  platoons  must  direct  their  prin- 
cipal attention  to  combine  in  such  a  manner,  the  movements  of 
their  half  platoons  and  skirmishers,  with  those  of  the  battalion 
or  corps,  as  always  to  keep  parallel  with  themt  and  to  preserve 
the  proper  distances  of  the  extended  order  which  they  have 
been  directed  to  take. 

It  may  happen  that  an  entire  company  shall  be  required  to 
extend  itself  for  the  purpose  of  covering  the  front  of  a  corps, 
without  leaving  any  part  formed  as  a  reserve.  In  this  case  the 
company  will  trail  arms,  advance  in  close  order,  and  when  ar- 
rived at  the  fioint  bianc  distance,  will  extend  itself  with  due 
celerity.  If  the  company  is  detached  from  the  right  wing,  it 
will  extend  to  the  left ;  and  so  of  the  contrary  wing,  or  centre;  as 
is  directed  in  §  3.  of  chapter  V.  and  illustrated  on  the  plates  1, 
2,  and  3. 

When  a  company,  battalion,  or  regiment,  has  been  formed  for 
an  attack  in  the  above  manner,  and  the  alarm  signal  given,  the 
skirmishers  retire  with  celerity,  through  the  intervals ;  in  the 
rear  of  which  they  form  and  wait  orders. 

Should  it  be  necessary  to  retire  across  a  plain ;  on  the  bat- 
talion or  company  going  to  the  left  about,  the  right  and  left 
flanked  files  of  each  platoon  remain  fronted.  In  retreating  the 
battalion  will  carefully  preserve  the  intervals  made  by  the  above 
files,  whose  business  it  is  to  extend  themselves  to  cover  the 
retreat,  following  at  the  distance  of  twelve  or  twenty  paces, 
and  by  their  fire  endeavoring  to  keep  the  enemy's  flankers  off. 
For  this  purpose  riflemen  should  be  practised  in  the  Pennsyl- 
vania method  of  priming  and  loading,  and  firing  on  the  march. 
During  such  manoeuvres  of  retreat,  it  will  be  particularly  ne- 
cessary that  coolness  and  firmnessbe  inculcated  with  riflemen, 
that  they  may  render  their  fire  cff^ect've, prevent  a  waste  of  am- 
munition, and  avoid  leaving  the  whole  unloaded  at  the  same 
time. 

If  attacked  by  cavalry,  the  signal  for  halt  being  first  given, 
the  battalion  or  regiment  fronts  ;  the  signal  for  retreat  being 
given,  the  skirmishers  fall  into  their  respective  places  in  the  line 


')5 


6S 


VIRST  PRINCIFXB8   Ot 


I! 


f 


ir  the  corps  is  to  continue  its  retreat,  it  will  face  to  ttie  right 
about ;  the  skirmishini;  files  remain  fronted  as  before.  When 
the  retreat  has  been  effected  to  the  proposed  point,  the  signal 
to  Aait  being  given,  the  corps  fronts,  the  skirmishers  are  called 
in,  and  the  whole  dress  by  the  centre.  -  '•  i; 

5  3.  OF  ADVANCING. 

In  advancing,  the  signal  being  given  to  advance^  it  is  follow- 
ed in<niediately  by  the  order  jfre. 

The  men  of  t^e  rear  rank  advance  by  the  right  of  their  file 
leaders,  to  the  from  ten  paces,  make  ready,  mark  tbf  xc  object, 
take  aim,  iud^re,  without  command. 

The  officers  being  provided  with  a  whistle  for  signal,  "•vkiii 
which  the  men  should  be  pteviuusly  exercised  j  that  officer 
who  is  stationed  on  the  dank  of  the  front  rani:,  gives  the  signal 
for  his  rank  to  move  ferward  in  like  manner  ten  paces,  passing 
by  the  left  elbow  of  the  rear  rank  man  ;  and  so  alternately. 

The  front  rank  is  under  the  guidance  of  the  subaltern&,  and 
the  vcav  rank  under  the  most  expert  non 'commissioned  ofii.v'-s; 
&!  0  captains  of  companies  are  between  the  ranks,  and  direct 
the  MvMii  as  occasion  requires. 

As  aonn  as  the  men  have  fired,  but  not  before,  the  proper 
ufficeic  dress  th<?,ir  ranks  quickly  as  possible  and  correct  their 
distances  where  necessary. 

After  the  signal  to  ccaae  Jiring  is  given...  not  a  shot  is  to  be 
fired,  and  the  men  are  halted. 

A  scheme  of  signals  by  the  whistle,  for  riflemen,  is  annexed 
to  this  work. 

$  4.  FORMATION  OF  THE  CHAIN. 

Riilemefi,  advanced  in  front  of  a  line  for  the  various  purpo- 
ses of  tactics,  are  called  tirailleura  in  the  French  movements, 
from  a  i<  rencb  term  signifying  irregular  shooters  ;  on  other 
oc<  asions  when  employed  to  make  discoveries  and  report  them, 
c.  lied  cc^treurt,  from  the  celerty  of  their  motion,  and  their 
attack  cooing  like  lightning.  In  their  extended  position  they 
aie  rienominated  all  together  \.hf  chain.  The  object  of  the  chain 
is  to  sc<>ur<:i  tract  of  country,  by  ni cans  of  a  detached  body 
more  or  less  numerous  as  occusion  may  require;  to  clear 
woods,  thickets,  morasses,  and  enclosures,  to  show  the  way  to- 
wards the  advance  posts  of  an  enemy  and  counteract  their  out- 


BIIXE  DISCIPLINE. 


67 


scouts,  and  report  both  their  position  and  movements ;  to  oc« 
cupy  as  far  as  circumstances  will  admit,  every  advantageous 
spot  or  position  in  front,  either  for  annoyance  of  an  enemy,  to 
prevent  the  enemy's  occupying  it,  or  to  form  ambuscades. 

In  skirmishing  the  men  are  dispersed  from  each  other,  and 
therefore,  require  a  stronger  reserve  to  guard  against  accidents, 
than  a  chain  which  consists  of  small  divisions ;  small  divisions 
must  be  never  less  than  four  men  each,  whose  mutual  depen- 
dence give  strength  and  energy  to  their  operations.  Posts  and 
detached  parties  must  ever  keep  up  a  communication  or  be 
within  view  of  each  other.  The  duty  of  a  chain  is  conse* 
quently  more  permanent  than  mere  skirmishing  parties. 

Where  one  company  only  Is  employed*  one  half  or  three 
fourths  may  be  advanced  one  hundred  paces,  to  form  the  chain; 
when  arrived  at  their  ground  they  extend  to  the  right,  left,  or 
from  the  centre*  in  divisions  of  two  files  each,  at  from  six  to  ten 
paces  distant  from  each  other  right  and  left ;  and  the  front  rank 
man  with  hi^  comrade  in  his  rear  two  paces.  The  remainder 
of  the  company  is  formed  in  the  rear,  as  a  support,  as  nearly 
in  the  centre  of  the  chain  as  may  be.     See  plate  VI.  fig.  9. 

When  seve<'al  companies  are  employed,  such  a  proportion 
may  be  detacherl  for  this,  and  generally  speaking  for  any  useful 
purpose*  as  is  consistent  with  the  views  of  the  commander. 

The  disposition  of  the  chain  in  front  being  made,  the  signal 
is  given  to  march.  The  chain  moves  forward  in  ordinary  time, 
preserving  the  due  distance  or  alignment.  The  section  of  re- 
serve follows  at  fifty  or  sixty  paces  distance,  to  support  if 
necessary. 

§  5.  OF  SKIRMISHING. 

It  is  a  good  rule,  that  no  more  than  half  of  a  company  of  rifle- 
men must  be  advanced  to  skirmish  at  one  time.  The  other 
half  is  reserved,  and  formed  ready  to  support  those  advanced. 

Where  there  is  only  one  company*  the  right  or  left  half  pla- 
toon according  to  the  direction  of  the  commanding  officer,  ad* 
vances  quick  sixty  paces,  from  whence  a  fourth  of  the  pi  tcion 
is  advanced  sixty  or  eighty  paces  more  ;  anci  extends  its  files  so 
as  to  cover  completely  the  main  body  from  which  it  is  detached. 
See  plate  VIII.  figures  6  and  7. 

Whenever  the  right  half  platoon  advances  to  skirmish,  the 
right  quarter  platoon  must  be  pushed  on  their  front  and  extend 


'i(' 


,  I 


u 


1 1 


fni'*i 


m. 


■ !  .  i 


68 


FISST  PBINCIPLB9  OF 


themselves  to  the  left,  and  so  the  contrary  half  platoons  ex- 
tend to  the  right. 

If  the  signal  to  Tnarch  is  given,  the  platoons  which  remain 
in  close  order,  and  the  half  platoons  in  advance,  moire  forward 
in  ordinary  time  and  cadence  with  the  line,  and  keep  their 
intervals  perfect.  The  skirmishers  that  have  been  pushed 
forward  in  front,  conduct  themselves  in  the  same  manner  as 
in  firing,  advancing  upon  the  spot  and  retreating. 
;  The  signal  for  Aait  being  given,  the  whole  halt,  face  the 
enemy,  keep  their  positions,  and  cease  firing.  If  the  signal 
for  retreat  is  given,  they  retreat  in  ordinary  time  in  good  order, 
and  their  distances  will  be  preserved. 

5  0.  DUTIES  AS  TIRAILLEURS. 

Light  troops,  having  performed  their  duties  in  advanced 
posts,  previous  to  the  commencement  of  an  engagement,  are 
to  be  posted  at  the  will  of  the  officer  in  command,  and  employed 
at  his  discretion.  The  duties  of  all  light  corps  when  thus 
advanced,  have  been  particularly  described  in  the  preceding 
sections  and  the  next  chapter ;  and  the  mode  of  service  is 
common  to  all  descriptions  of  light  troops  on  Toot,  in  this 
department  of  duty.  If  they  are  advanced  upon  the  front  of 
the  line,  they  according  to  the  modern  tactics  accompany  the 
fiying  artillery  and  light  cavalry^  or  hussars,  which  co-operate 
with  them.  The  light  infantry  (or  rifle  corps)  acting  as  tirail- 
leurs, or  irregular  shooters. 

Unevenness  of  ground  is  always  in  favor  of  riflemen  thus 
advanced,  and  it  is  their  duty  to  take  advantage  of  every  means 
that  offers  to  cover  themselves  from  tke  enemy's  Are  while 
they  can  perform  their  duty  in  annoying  the  enemy.  They 
must  not  be  detained  from  taking  their  proper  positions  by 
any  avenues  or  openness  of  ground  where  they  may  chance 
to  be  placed. 

If  the  main  body  to  which  they  are  attached  is  about  to 
advance  to  action,  the  proper  signals  will  be  given  for  the 
light  corps  to  retire  to  their  proper  stations.  If  the  enemy 
advances,  the  light  corps  williikcwise retire  in  steady  order, 
keeping  up  the  retreating  tire  without  intermission  till  they 
are  within  fioint  bUmc  shot  of  their  own  line,  when  they  will 
retire  through  thie  ituervals  and  take  the  post  assigned  thcni. 
See  plate  VII.  fig.  4. 


RIIXB  DISOIPLINE. 


•• 


If  the  light  troops  should  happen  to  be  in  front  of  the  artil- 
lerjr  of  their  own  line,  which  their  oiRcers  should  ever  take 
care  to  guard  against,  the  artillery  of  the  line  may  be  embar- 
rassed, and  timely  care  should  be  taken  to  incline  from  that 
direction. 

The  general  duties  of  rifle  corpt  apply  to  every  description 
of  light  infantry,  and  the  attentive  and  judicious  military  8tu> 
dent  will  be  able  to  combine  the  instructions  for  both  where 
they  are  analogous.  Their  movements  are  perspicuously 
explained  in  the  several  plates  attached  to  this  work.  The 
general  duties  of  riflemen  are  also  comprehended  under  the 
other  remaining  heads....but  all  the  duties  of  light  infantry 
will  much  depend  upon  locality,  the  nature  of  the  countryi 
the  force  and  composition  of  the  enemy's  troops,  and  the 
activity  tnd  intelligence  of  your  own  officers. 

An  enomy  must  be  approached  as  long  as  possible  unper> 
ceived....but  tirailleurs  roust  not  be  so  far  distant  as  not  to  be 
able  to  unite  promptly,  if  required.  A  knowledge  of  the 
country  and  of  the  customs  and  dispositions  of  the  people,  will 
much  serve  the  purposes  of  advanced  light  corps. 

,1  $  7.  OF  RETREATING.  ,         , 

When  it  is  determined  to  retreat,  the  signal  for^inn^  being 
given,  it  is  followed  by  the  signal  for  retreating.  The  rank 
which  happens  to  be  then  in  front,  immediately  fires,  goes  to 
the  left  about,  and  marches  to  the  rear  through  the  intervals, 
twelve  or  twenty  paces,  as  may  be  directed,  fronts  and^loads. 

When  the  leaders  of  the  next  rank  see  the  rank  that  has  re* 
tired  formed,  and  loading  in  their  rear,  they  give  the  whistle 
signal  for  their  rank  to  fire ;  and  on  firing  come  to  the  right, 
pursue  their  retreat  through  the  intervals,  the  given  distance, 
come  to  the  left  about,  load  and  dress  ;  and  so  on  alternately. 

Both  in  advancing  and  retreating,  arms  are  trailed^  and  when 
the  signal  for  halting  is  given,  each  rank  preserves  the  ground 
which  it  is  upon,  facing  towards  the  enemy.  See  plate  VII. 
figs.  4  and  5. 

§  8.  DUTIES  IN  ENGAGEMENTS. 

In  the  heat  of  battle,  light  corps  often  decide  the  conflict. 
They  annoy  the  enemy  by  a  galling  fire  on  his  flanks.  They 
form  In  various  small  but  compact  bodies  on  numerous  points, 
and  sustain  c&valry  or  horse  artillery.    They  gain  the  rear 


lV;ii 


•f-'i';  ■  1 


m 


k  i 


■-*•>-»., 


II 


III 


.1.. 


I      I 


I       ;' 


I   \  i 


I  i^ 


70 


FIRST  PBINOIPLVS  OV 


of  an  enemy  in  force)  and  attack  his  rear,  hii  baggage,  or  his 
aronnunition.  They  attack  a  general  officer  and  carry  him  or 
his  suit  off  prisoners.  They  intercept  the  aids-de-camp,  and 
then  tend  the  orders  they  intercept  to  their  own  head  quarters, 
or  to  the  quarters  or  post  of  the  most  contiguous  chief  officer 
of  division  of  their  own  army.  They  carry  off  as  prisoners 
commissaries  or  other  intelligent  persons,  who  appear  com< 
petent  to  give  intelligence  of  the  enemy's  affairs.  They  seize 
all  papers  and  send  them  unopened  to  head  quarters. 

§  9.  CROSSING  RIVERS. 

Light  troops  being  always  in  advance,  and  being  the  most 
hardy,  they  are  usually  dextrous  in  passing  rivers.  If  it  should 
be  necessary  for  an  army  to  pass,  and  the  construction  of 
bridges  occupy  much  time,  light  infantry  are  sent  across  in 
advance,  to  reconnoitre,  to  report  on  all  that  is  interesting,  to 
establish  themselves  if  requisite  in  good  positions,  to  occupy 
posts  near  the  rivers,  woods,  hedges,  houses,  villages,  and  to 
prevent  any  communication  with  an  enemy,  so  that  in  the 
passage  of  the  river  the  main  army  may  be  unmolested, 

The  occupation  of  the  positions  also  comprehends  the 
guarding  against  and  the  prevention  of  ambuscades.  If  it  is 
rendered  necessary  by  the  want  of  positions  naturally  strong, 
light  troops  should  also  construct  small  redoubts ;  and  if  the 
enemy  should  attempt  to  dislodge  the  light  troops,  they  should 
form  ambuscades,  and  resort  to  suitable  modes  and  stratagems 
to  impede  the  march  of  the  enemy. 

To  illustrate  to  the  eyct  a  few  examples  are  given  of  the 
positions,  and  mode  of  going  into  action  with  light  troops,  of 
the  mode  of  march,  when  they  act  as  outposts,  and  advanced 
or  rearguard,  advancing  or  retreating,     ws  jJ-  iUi;frs.f^<ift»vi 

The  plate  X.  fig.  1,  represents  the  mode  in  which  light 
troops  commence  an  attack  in  a  regular  engagement ;  the 
first  line  of  the  enemy  is  seen  at  B  B,its  left  Bank  covered  by 
a  village,  its  left  wing  with  its  front  on  elevated  ground,  and 
the  right  wing  covered  by  a  river,  running  obliquely  to  its  rear. 

A  At  represents  the  positions  of  the  attacking  army,  in  two 
lines ;  extending  parallel  to  the  enemy  but  obliquely  across 
a  high  road. 

C,exhibits  enclosed  groundsand  fields,  at  the  foot  of  the  ele* 
vated  ground  on  which  the  enemy  is  posted,  of  which  the  light 


cd 
wi 


)     , 


BinB  DIBOIPLmt. 


n 


troopi  are  taking  possessioni  and  from  thence  annoying  the 
enemy's  front. 
D  D,  light  troops  potsessing  a  hollow  way  at  the  foot  of  the 
hill  on  which  the  left  wing  of  the  enemy  is  posted. 

£  E,  light  artillery,  and  light  infantry,  part  of  whom  lie  on 
the  ground  for  cover,  their  position  being  enclosed. 
F  F,  light  cavalry  on  the  flanks  of  light  infantry,  attacking 
the  enemy's  cavalry^ 

G,  detachments  of  dragoons,  or  other  horse,  advancing  to 
support  the  tirailleurs  and  light  artillery. 

H,  light  troops,  extending  to  cover  the  flanks,  and  keeping 
intervals  to  admit  troops  from  the  front,  if  they  should  need  to 
retreat;  and  to  support  them,  if  required  to  push  on  in  advance. 

Plate  X,  Fig.  3,  represents  the  manner  in  which  ^ight  troops 
may  cover  the  flanks  of  battalions  of  infantry  in  line.  The 
direction  of  the  colors  shows  the  front  of  the  corps. 

A,  shows  the  right  wing  of  an  army  composed  wholly  of 
infantry. 

B  B,  the  positions  of  cavalry  of  the  light  wing,  at  different 
times. 

C  C,  light  infantry,  formed  in  column,  in  order  to  follow  and 
cover  their  movements,  between  the  two  lines ;  and  to  advance 
upon  either  or  both  flanks,  or  by  their  intervals,  as  may  be 
required. 

D  D,  reserved  line  of  infantry,  stationed  to  support  the 
two  first,  thrown  into  line  and  column,  prepared  for  either 
movement. 

E,  squadrons  of  cavalry,  escorting  light  artillery  from  the 
rear  to  the  flank. 

F,  a  heavy  line  of  enemy's  cavalry  bearing  down  upon  the 
line,  but  kept  in  check  by  the  advance  of  the  cavalry  G  G, 
which  comes  up  in  oblique  ordjer  to  support  the  disconcerted 
squadrons  at  L. 

E  E,  flying  artillery,  advancing  from  the  rear  to  support 
the  cavalry  dis  oncerted  at  L,  and  the  oblique  wheel  upon 
their  left  of  the  cavalry  G  G. 

H,  position  of  light  troops  advancing  from  the  rear  of  the 
column  of  infantry,  in  an  oblique  direction,  to  act  in  concert 
with  the  light  artillery  at  E,  and  the  charge  of  the  cavalry  at 
G  G,  and  attack  the  enemy  F  F,  at  the  same  moment  on  both 
flanks  and  front. 


1 


M 


f: 


P 


'■ 


,n 


i  (i 


1 


/; 


7S 


nSST  FBIlfOIFLSB  Of 


1 1,  part  of  the  second  line  wheeling  into  the  position  of  the 
troops  at  Cf  which  have  furnished  the  column  H  H. 

K,  a  division  faced  about  to  support  the  light  ;irn:'.  ry,  E, 
in  their  attack. 

Plate  X.  fig.  3,  represents  the  disposition  of  light  tt>^''>p3  in 
a  weak  position.  To  provide  against  emergencies,  into  which 
necessity  majr  force  an  army,  is  a  proper  consideration  in  the 
study  of  tactics.  In  retreats  the  choice  of  ground  is  rarely  at 
the  discretion  of  the  retreating  army ;  and  how  to  make  choice 
of  the  best  means  to  defend  the  weakest  place,  is  not  only 
most  important  in  itself,  but  it  also  unfolds  the  means  of  de« 
fence  generally. 

The  ground  into  which  the  army  on  the  defensive  is  forced, 
is  supposed  to  be  flitoked  by  hills  or  mountains ;  such  are 
many  of  the  positions  recorded  in  the  retreat  of  the  ten 
thousand  Creeks,  of  Championnet  in  Italy,  and  of  Moreau 
from  Swabia  to  the  Rhine.  ■ -.        ^ 

Having  performed  a  severe  day's  march  in  retreat,  the  troops 
from  fatigue  occupy  a  defile.  The  light  corps  of  rifle  and  light 
infantry  cover  the  rear  ;  and  as  soon  as  the  lines  are  posted, 
and  such  works  as  may  be  necessary  for  artillery  thrown  up,  the 
light  corps  have  formed  as  the  ground  will  admit  on  the  flanks. 

The  weak  points  of  the  position  are  shown  by  the  letters  A  A. 

B,  shows  the  first  line,  formed  three  deep,  with  the  artillery 
of  the  three  lines  in  the  intervals  of  corps. 

C,  The  second  line,  formed  three  deep,  forming  column  of 
battalion,  their  heads  opposite  the  intervals  of  the  front  line ; 
ready  to  advance  in  column  or  in  echellon  ;  should  the  first 
line  be  shaken  or  need  support. 

D,  The  third  line,  formed  three  deep,  to  support  the  second 
line. 

£,  Ground  marked  for  the  position  of  the  first  line,  should 
it  be  found  necessary  to  retreat,  while  the  second  line  ad- 
vances ;  either  from  the  usefulness  of  a  succession  of  troops, 
or  through  severe  service. 

F,  Cavalry  in  reserve. 

G  G,  Flying  artillery  in  reserve  to  cover  the  advance  of  the 
second  line ;  and  the  third  Ime. 
The  foregoing  sketches  of  the  service  of  lii;ht  corps  are 
given,  to  induce  a  more  intimate  enquiry  into  the  principles 
of  discipline. 


k 


IV 


Bifus  DiiciminB. 


73 


f  10.  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  MOVEMENTS. 

Plate  X.  Fig.  1.  repreienti  a  march  advancing  in  en  open 
country.  A.  a  amall  detachment  of  mounted  light  troopSj 
opening  the  route.  B.  a  strong  advanced  guard,  with  an 
cicort  of  stores.  C.  the  park  of  artillery.  D.  the  main  body 
in  column.  £.  the  engineers  and  artillery  equipage,  with 
the  artillery  of  the  line.  F.  the  cavalry  in  column.  G.  the 
baggage  of  the  army  and  camp  equipage.  H.  the  rear  guard. 
1. 1.  1. 1,  shew  the  position  of  the  fldiikers;  which,  in  a  close 
country,  must  be  riflemen  ;  but  in  an  open  country,  should 
be  mounted  light  dragoons,  mixed  with  mounted  riflemen) 
or  in  alternate  troops. 

Fig-  3.  a  movement  of  the  same  nature,  in  an  intersected 
country,  after  passing  a  defile,  and  entering  a  valley  with  a 
river  on  their  left  flank,  and  thick  woods  on  their  right. 

The  dispositions  of  the  front  must  be  here  strong,  because 
formation  in  order  of  battle  is  not  so  easy  as  in  an  open  coun- 
try ;  the  artillery  battery  must,  therefore,  be  powerful  with 
the  advanced  guard,  which  must  be  strong  itself;  and  the 
riflemen  in  numerous  strong  advanced  parties,  particularly 
in  the  advanced  flanks. 

A.  is  the  corps  of  light  troops  in  advance,  as  ecMreura.  B. 
the  advanced  guard,  with  its  strong  battery  of  fitid  artillery, 
and  some  light  artillery  ;  the  magazine  and  park  equipage. 
C.  the  main  body  of  infantry  in  column  of  march.  D.  the 
cavalry.  £.  the  park  and  baggage,  just  passed  through  the 
defile.  F.  the  rear  guard,  about  to  pass  the  defile.  G.  G. 
G.  G.  the  riflemen,  as  out  posts  and  flankers. 

Plate  XI.  Fig.  1.  represents  an  ambuscade  laid  in  an  inter- 
sected woody  country,  for  an  enemy  on  its  march.  A.  A. 
describe  the  route  which  the  enemy  is  pursuing.  B.  the 
position  of  the  principal  corps  destined  to  take  the  enemy  in 
ambuscade.  C.  C.  two  other  detachments,  intended  to  take 
advantage  of  the  ambuscade  upon  the  enemy  and  attack  his 
rear,  or  if  he  should  push  forward,  to  intercept  his  retreat  by 
the  road  on  his  left.  D.  a  corps  posted  to  intercept  the  ene- 
my, if  it  should  attempt  to  retreat  by  the  road  on  its  right. 
£.  the  advanced  guard  of  the  enemy.  The  enemy's  rear 
guard  is  in  front  of  A.  and  C.  the  main  body  moving  In 
column  towards  E.    Light  corps  are  concealed,  during  such 

b 


^    i\ 


M 


ff 


ill 


l'' '»l 


II 


ir  i  r 


74 


FIRST  FRTXCIFLES  OF 


ii 


V:  '. 


J  '\ 

■\ 

K 

'i 

r  ■ 

i  f 

V 

!:!i 


i  l:hl 


ambuscadeS)  and  they  mubt  make  such  precautionary  arrange* 
mentS)  as  not  to  reach  each  other  in  any  cross  fire. 

Plate  XI.  Fig.  2,  represents  the  interception  of  a  convoy  of 
boats  passing  down  a  river.  B.  B.  represents  the  fleet  of  boats 
passing  down.  A.  a  party  stationed  in  concealment,  with  bat- 
teries of  artillery,  masked  on  the  shores,  by  bushes  cut  and 
placed  so  as  to  be  suddenly  removed  and  leave  the  battery  open. 
C.  the  guns  placed  so  as  to  produce  a  cross  fire,  and  the  line 
oi  fire  described.  D.  small  islands  in  the  river  lower  dotrn, 
behind  which  such  of  the  boats  as  have  escaped,  seek  to  hide. 
£.  and  F.  troops. ...so.ne  of  which  have  previously  passed,  in 
anticipation  of  such  an  event,  and  who  seize  the  fugitives. 

Plate  XII.  Fig.  1.  shews  the  dispositions  for  crossing  a 
river  in  the  face  of  an  enemy.  The  enemy  is  supposed  to  be 
entrenched  on  the  high  grounds  at  D.  The  army  intending 
to  pass  the  river  at  A.  B.  C.  detaches  its  cavalry  and  light 
troops  to  occupy  the  strongest  ground  on  the  opposite  side » 
while  the  artillery  of  the  right  and  left  wings,  B.  and  C.  cover 
the  passage  of  the  river,  by  the  centre,  A.  in  two  columns  ; 
their  movement  is  oblique  to  the  current.  £.  the  riflemen 
occupying  the  hedges  and  skirts  of  the  woods,  after  crossing. 
F.  the  cavalry  of  the  advance  forming  on  a  piece  of  open 
ground.  G.  the  route  of  the  right  column  of  the  centre,  as  it 
passes  the  river  ;  the  left  column  pursues  the  route  of  £.  E. 

Plate  XII. Fig.  2.  represents  the  dispositions  made  for  pass- 
ing  a  river  in  retreat.  An  island  is  preferred,  where  access  is, 
in  the  first  instance,  easy ;  as  afibrding  also  some  defence  as  a 
ditch,  to  repel  assault.  The  position  chosen  on  the  opposite 
branch  of  the  river,  will  be  governed  more  by  the  nature  of 
the  bank  upon  which  the  landing  is  to  be  made,  which  is  the 
principal  object,  and  must  be  so  calculated  as  to  the  ofi'set  of 
the  current, when  many  vessels  are  launched  and  passing.  A. 
the  place  chosen  for  the  embarkation.  C.  the  position  taken 
by  the  first  division  of  light  troops,  cavalry  and  artiUery,which 
have  passed,  with  artillery  posted  so  as  to  cover  the  landing 
lower  down.  D.  D.  the  cavalry  and  baggage  posted  and 
masked  while  the  main  body  is  passing  the  river.  £.  £.  the 
rear  guard  and  picket  of  cavalry  and  of  rillemen,  posted  to 
cover  the  retreat.  F.  the  ground  upon  which  the  army  is  to 
encamp  after  pasing  the  river,  G.  the  high  ground  occupied 
by  the  enemy.  H.  H.  redoubts  with  tioops  to  serve  them  to 
rover  the  passage  of  both  streams  and  the  retreat. 


Jl 


KIFLE  DISCIPLINE. 


75 


CHAP.  vn. 


m 


§  I.  DUTIES  OF  LIGHT  CORPS  ON  SERVICE. 

As  the  United  States  cannot  be  attacked  but  from  the 
sea,  or  from  Canada,  Florida,  or  Louisiana,  attention  should 
be  particularly  paid  to  the  duties  of  those  who  would  have  to 
guard  the  sea  coast,  and  to  repel,  annoy,  impede,  or  watch  an 
invading  enemy.  In  every  instance  regarding  the  service  as 
defensive,  we  must  always  keep  in  mind  the  solid  maxim  of 
the  general  La  Fayettey  "  that  there  is  no  effective  system  of 
defence  which  does  not  act  on  the  offensive ;"  light  corps 
being  always  preferred  in  advanced  service,  their  duties 
apply  to  every  corps  employed  in  the  like  service. 

An  officer  commanding  a  strong  detachment  on  the  coast 
must  consider  two  things  as  equally  important :  first,  that  he 
should  be  able  to  maintain  his  post,  by  preventing  a  landing ; 
or,  secondly,  that  should  he  be  obliged  to  fall  back,  he  should 
not  be  overpowered  by  the  superior  force  of  the  enemy. 

The  first  thing  he  ought  to  do,  is  to  choose  some  strong 
position  or  commanding  ground,  where  he  can  place  a  steady 
officer  to  look  out,  with  a  good  telescope,  and  obtain  timely 
information  of  the  number,  size,  and  strength  of  the  vessels, 
in  the  road  or  bay,  or  if  any  cruizer  is  thereabouts  who  could 
give  him  proper  intelligence  or  act  in  defence  in  common 
with  him.  He  must  keep  a  good  intelligence  with  the  beat 
disposed  inhabitants,  particularly  with  the  seafaring  people,  in 
his  neighborhood,  from  whom  he  may  learn  the  nation  and 
number  of  ships,  8cc.  He  ought  Jto  be  capable  of  distinguish* 
ing  a  transport  or  merchantman  from  a  man  of  war,  frigate, 
bomb  vessel,  or  gun  boat ;  not  only  for  the  sake  of  his  own 
safety,  but  that  he  may  be  able  to  deliver  a  true  and  correct 
report  of  the  enemy's  strength,  to  the  general  or  superior  offi* 
cer  neatest  to  him,  or  under  whose  orders  he  may  be  placed. 

As  soon  as  an  enemy  is  in  sight,  the  commai^ding  officer 
must  immediately  be  informed  of  their  strength  ;  the  number 
and  size  of  the  vessels.    He  ought  to  reckon  by  the  tide,  at 


n  A 


inr 


Ki 


I): 


/■V 


i  ;♦ 


:  (ii 


76 


FIBST  FBINOIPLBS   Of 


what  hour,  by  day  and  night,  a  landing  can  be  effected,  and 
judge,  by  the  form  of  the  coast,  and  depth  of  the  water,  in 
what  place  the  troops  can  be  disembarked.  Having  made 
these  observations,  he  mustsenda  circumstantial  report  of  the 
whole  to  his  commanding  general,  and  an  advice  to  the  posts 
nearest  to  him ;  after  this  he  will  transmit  a  further  account 
of  the  most  probable  schemes  or  progress  of  the  enemy. 

If  an  enemy's  fleet  be  discovered,  or  any  signal  given  of  its 
approach,  late  in  ihe  evenmg,  an  officer  commanding  on  the 
coast  must  never  light  a  fire  during  the  night,  except  it  be 
specially  ordered  by  his  instructions,  for  fear  of  affording  the 
enemy  a  facility  in  sounding,  or  the  mvans  of  landing  some 
small  parties,  who  might  fall  unexpectedly  upon  his  outposts, 
and  cut  off  the  communication  between  them ;  a  complete 
landing  being  very  unusual  and  difficult  during  the  night. 
However,  a  third  part  of  the  troops  may  remain  on  duty,  and 
contmual  patroles  be  sent  out  from  one  place  to  another; 
besides  this  the  remainder  of  the  men  should  be  quartered  in 
such  a  manner  that  they  may  be  collected  together  in  a  short 
time.  If  on  the  break  of  day,  the  enemy  should  attempt  to 
land  any  troops,  the  commanding  officer,  who  is  supposed  to 
be  in  force,  must  have  his  army  on  a  point  from  whence  he 
can  best  obstruct  or  prevent  it. 

With  respect  to  artillery,  ir  he  has  pieces  of  a  large  calibre, 
and  a  sufficient  number  of  horses  cannot  be  procured  to  re> 
move  them,  they  should  be  buried,  or  concealed  In  a  river 
or  marsh.  Small  ordnance,  such  as  6  and  12  pounders, 
although  they  do  not  carry  so  far  as  those  of  a  heavier  metal, 
are  undoub.edly  more  useful,  on  account  of  the  facility  with 
which  they  may  be  transporied  to  any  place,  according  to  the 
movements  of  the  enemy. 

The  best  places  for  the  erecting  of  batteries,  are,  in  general, 
capes  cr  projecting  lands;  they  must,  if  possible,  be  chosen 
near  to  each  other,  so  that  from  any  two  ot  them  a  ctoss  fire 
may  be  kept  upon  such  of  the  enemy's  sloops  or  small  vessels 
as  are  filled  viih  troops.  Points  which  are  too  elevated, 
though  they  muy  roniiitanti  a  better  view  o{  the  sea,  arc  not  so 
well  adapteid  for  erecting  batteries  for  defence, as  low  places, 
from  whence  the  surface  of  tlic  water  can  be  completely 
swept. 


BIVLB  DISC^ -T.INE. 


77 


As  the  saliant  angles  will  of  courf>e  be  provided  with  ord« 
nance,  the  other  points  which  itppeai-  to  be  accessible  must 
be  barricadoed  with  large  trees,  cut  fer  that  put  pose  enabatia^ 
or  defended  by  breastworks ;  here  riflemen  and  light  infantry 
may  be  posted,  m  small  parties  uf  half  a  dozen,  under  a  cor- 
poral or  serjeunt,  supported  by  the  pikemen  and  miliiia  of 
the  place,  in  a  second  line,  commanded  by  their  oiticers 
jointly  with  thobe  of  the  riflemen,  in  order  to  repulse  any 
cavalry  the  eneniy  may  attempt  to  put  on  shore. 

The  remainder  of  the  infantry  may  be  drawn  up  in  two 
ranks,  at  some  small  distance  from  the  shore,  with  field 
pieces  on  a  central  point,  from  whence  every  landing  place 
can  be  reached  immediately.  The  cavalry  may  be  divided 
into  two  or  three  bodies  of  troops,  according  to  its  number, 
and  placed,  if  possible,  behind  some  height  or  rising  ground, 
not  only  to  be  sheltered  from  the  enemy's  fire,  but  also  to 
surprise  him  the  better  by  a  sudden  and  unexpected  attack. 

In  case  the  enemy  should  land  any  forces,  notwithstanding 
the  grape  shot  of  the  cannon,  and  the  fire  of  the  riflemen, 
the  commanding  ofHcer  must  suddenly  oppose  themi  and 
being  with  his  infantry  at  fifty  or  sixty  paces  distant,  he  will 
order  the  riflemen  to  fall  back  on  the  flanks,  and  commence 
a  brisk  discharge  of  artillery  and  small  arms. 

Should  the  enemy  continue  to  advance,  a  signal  previously 
agreed  on,  should  be  given  to  the  ofiicer  commanding  the 
cavalry ;  and  he  must,  without  losing  a  moment,  fall  into  two 
different  corps  upon  the  enemy's  wings ;  the  infantry  with 
fixed  bayonets,  and  the  pikemen,  will  support  this  attack. 
The  third  corps  of  cavalry  will  always  be  kept  in  reserve  to 
favor  a  retreet^  if  the  enemy  should  prove  too  strong,  or  be 
reinforced  with  other  troops,  effecting  a  second  i.nding  in 
some  place  where  less  resistance  has  been  madti;  or  if  he 
should  become  able  to  maintain  himself  on  shore  with  a  dou- 
ble  or  triple  number  of  men,  and  endeavor  to  cut  otf  the 
main  'jody  of  our  troops. 

l;nder  these  circumstances,  and  after  having  tried  every 
m  sthod  of  defence,  if  the  commanding  ofiicer  finds  the  ene> 
ir.y's  superiority,  he  will  send  some  ordtriy  cavalry  in  full 
{;allop  to  each  of  his  batteries  and  posts,  to  draw  off  the  pieces 
o.'  ordnance,  if  horses  can  be  procured  ;  and  he  will  keep  a 


> 


Iff 


H 


H 


1/ 


I  \M'i 


78 


yiRST  PRINCIPLES    OF 


llijV' 


steady  and  constant  Are,  till  all  his  posts  and  artillery  can  join 
in  such  place  as  has  been  previously  and  confidentially  agreed 
uponi  by  the  respective  commanding  officers  of  each  corps, 
battery}  or  outpost.  In  the  mean  time,  he  will  send  advice 
of  his  retreat,  mentioning  at  what  place  he  means  to  rally  his 
troops,  to  both  the  commanding  officers  on  the  coast,  on  his 
right  and  on  his  left,  in  order  that  they  may  not  be  surprised 
nor  cut  off;  and  also  to  the  next  general,  under  whose  orders 
he  may  be,  or  who  is  appointed  to  support  him.  Some  of  his 
light  horse  must  be  dispatched  to  the  magazines  of  forage 
or  ammunition,  which  it  may  be  necessary  according  to  his 
instructions  to  remove  or  burn.  His  corps  of  reserve  cava!* 
ry,  with  a  good  number  of  light  infantry  or  riflemen,  will  be 
ordered  to  cover  his  retreat  in  the  manner  explained  in  the 
next  section.  All  cattle  and  provisions  will  be  ordered  far- 
ther  into  the  country,  and  small  detachments  sent  where  it 
may  be  necessary  to  cover  and  protect  their  dispositions. 

§  2.  CONDUCT  IN  A  RETREAT. 

Another  event  which  may  possibly  happen,  is,  that  an  offi- 
cer  on  the  coast  commanding  only  a  look-out  post,  and  not 
having  sufficient  means  of  defence,  either  in  men  or  artillery, 
will  be  obliged,  according  to  his  instructions,  to  quit  the  place, 
on  account  of  the  enemy  landing  with  a  superior  force. 

An  officer  thus  situated  ought  to  take  every  possible  pre* 
caution  before  hand  to  secure  his  retreat  (keeping,  however, 
the  strictest  secrecy  with  regard  to  his  intentions  and  instruc- 
tions :)  and  after  having  properly  observed  the  strength  of  the 
enemy,  and  seen  their  landing  put  in  execution ;  he  must 
send  a  correct  and  circumstantial  report  to  the  general  under 
whusc  orders  he  may  be  placed,  and  an  advice  to  the  posts  on 
the  shore  to  his  right  and  left,  in  order  to  prevent  their  being 
surprised  ;  he  will  also  inform  the  principal  magistrates  and 
inhabitants,  in  time,  of  the  place  of  his  retreat;  to  prevent 
being  cut  oil',  he  ^vill  send  his  infantry  before,  and  retain  the 
militia  or  volunteers  of  tlie  place  with  him.  But  if  old  or 
married  men  or  heads  of  families  should  decline  to  march, 
he  will  disarm  them  to  save  them  frem  the  violence  of  the 
enemy,  who  may  carry  off  the  arms.  Ho  must  order  majja- 
zines  to  be  burnt,  which  cannot  be  transported  towards  ihc 


RI7I.E  DISCIPLINE. 


r# 


interior,  and  see  his  orders  executed  before  his  departure ; 
while  this  is  doing  he  will  keep  a  watchful  eye  over  the  mo- 
tions of  the  enemy ;  and  having  obtained  a  perfect  knowlege' 
of  his  strength,  will  finally  follow  his  infantry. 

The  public  cash,  and  all  belonging  to  the  public  In  his 
neighborhood,  must  be  taken  particular  care  of;  as  must 
also,  if  possible,  the  money  belonging  to  the  inhabitants  or 
individual  merchants,  which  may  have  been  entrusted  to  the 
military.  Such  property  may  easily  be  sent  in  good  time  in- 
to the  interior ;  and  if  the  commanding  officer  has  not  orders 
to  enforce  these  salutary  measures,  he  must  use  every  argu- 
ment to  persuade  the  proprietors  to  adopt  them,  but  linder  no 
circumstances  roust  they  fall  into  the  hands  of  the  enemy. 

Having  done  this,  the  commanding  officer  will  close  his 
retreat  with  some  picked  young  men  of  his  infantryi  who 
are  to  break  up  the  roads,  and  destroy  the  wooden  bridges 
between  the  enemy  and  his  corps,  to  prevent  his  being  pur- 
sued. Ir  there  should  be  any  place  where  the  progress  of 
the  enemy  can  be  opposed  with  a  probability  of  success,  his 
cavalry  may  halt  and  remain  there  some  hours,  particularly 
if  some  small  detachments  have  been  cut  off,  and  are  expect- 
ed to  join  the  main  body.  The  infantry,  which  began  to 
retreat,  having  carefully  taken  the  firelocks  from  those  inha- 
bitants who  were  unwilling  to  leave  their  dwellings,  every 
soldier,  who  is  able,  will  carry  two  of  these  firelocks,  if  no 
carts  or  waggons  can  be  had. 

A  commanding  officer  who  is  obliged  to  retreat  from  a 
place,  or  to  fight  the  enemy  at  the  oatside  of  it,  will  do  well 
to  leave  behind,  as  long  as  possible,  a  small  detachment  of 
infantry,  and  half  a  dozen  cavalry,  under  a  steady  serjeant  or 
corporal,  to  prevent  any  disorders  which  ill-disposed  men 
might  commit  during  the  affair.  The  commanding  officer 
should  never  confide  too  implicitly  in  the  inhabitants  of  a 
place  where  he  is  quartered,  unless  he  has  a  perfect  know- 
lege of  their  disposiuons  towards  their  country  and  dislike  of 
the  enemy ;  if  suspicious,  iheir  conduct  must  be  jealously 
watched  :  the  least  intelligence  with  the  enemy,  disaff  i;cted 
sentiments,  cowardice,  or  fear  oi  an  invasion,  may,  in  the 
moment  \vhen  an  attack  is  cxpeeted,  discover  dispositions 
which  had  hitherto  been  concealed  ;  and  precaution  is  always 


\ 


;^  I 


% 


■  ■  i  ' 

'i'i 


I!  Ml: 


'f': 


■■''i 


i 


■m 


'..I 


SO 


VIBBT  PRINCmES  oir 


the  surest'  road  to  security.  Above  all  tbings^  the  care  of 
setting  fire  to  the  ammunition,  stores,  or  forage,  vhich  can* 
not  be  carried  offy  must  never  be  left  to  the  inhabitants,  but 
be  performed  bjr  the  troops  just  before  the  retreat. 

§  3.  HOW  THEY  ACT  IN  CONCERT  WITH  HORSE. 

To  make  a  retreat  in  good  order  and  with  security,  re* 
quires  the  greatest  skill  of  all  military  movements.  To 
effect  this,  it  is  necessary  that  a  prudent  and  well  informed 
commanding  officer  should  remain  in  the  rear,  the  care  of 
leading  the  column  being  entrusted  to  some  officer  whose 
abilities  can  be  equally  relied  on. 

It  is  a  general  rule  (except  when  acting  in  a  plain),  that 
cavalry  ought  to  retreat  first ;  after  it  the  infantry ;  only  a 
sir.ail  number  of  cavalry  remaining  behind,  chiefly  to  convey 
orders  to  ihe  head  of  the  colunm  when  it  may  be  requisite  to 
close  its  files,  or  increase  its  pace. 

The  rear  i^uard  must  endeavor,  as  often  as  possible,  to 
block  up  the  way,  especially  in  the  most  narrow  passages, 
where  the  pursuit  made  by  the  enemy  may  be  much  obstruct- 
ed. This  can  be  done  by  felling  large  trees  in  the  dcfites, 
or  placing  waggons  from  which  the  wheels  have  been  taken 
away,  and  will  considerably  delay  the  enemy's  approach. 

If  the  retreat  lies  over  a  wooden  bridge,  the  commanding 
officer  may  order  some  men  at  the  head  of  the  column  to  take 
out  the  nails  btid  disjoint  the  pbnks,  after  which  the  rear 
guard  will  take  them  off  and  burn  or  otherwise  destroy  the 
bridge.  Should  there  be  many  trees  or  thickets  on  the  bor- 
ders of  the  river,  some  riflemen  or  light  infantry  may  be  left 
behind,  with  a  small  body  of  cavalry  in  a  second  line  to  sup> 
port  them....these  will  check  the  enemy,  by  a  constant  and  well 
directed  fire,  till  the  whole  of  the  oolumn  get  out  of  reach. 
But  if  the  borders  of  the  river  are  steep,  and  the  country  flat 
and  open,  cavalry  may  be  placed  at  some  distance  from  the 
river  just  opposite  those  parts  which  are  fordable,  where  they 
will  be  ready  to  cha''f;e  the  enemy  immediately  upon  his  cross* 
ing,  and  thtr  >/  aaord  the  infantry  time  to  make  good  their 
retreat;  aftci  which  the  caval   '  may  rfi:reat,  and  join  them. 

If  the  ret  out  should  be  across  un  extensive  plain  or  heath| 
where  mai^y  roads  meet,  the  infantry  may  begin  the  retreat  by 


KIILE  DlfiCIFLINS. 


81 


double  files,  with  M  the  artillery  in  the  front  which  may  not 
be  necessary  to  protect  this  movement,  and  which  must  be 
placed  before  the  cavalry,  who  must  march  also  by  double  files 
from  the  centre.  In  case  the  enemy  should  attack,  the  com- 
mander of  the  artillery  must  order  it  to  halt,  and  turn  his  guns 
towards  the  enemy  ;  the  two  first  files  of  the  cavalry  wheel 
about  and  face  the  enemy ;  and  the  right  files  wheel  suddenly 
to  the  left,  and  the  left  files  to  the  right ;  the  centre  slowly  and 
the  wings  in  full  gallop,  forming  a  line  which  fronts  ihc  enemy. 

The  infantry  must  be  ordered  to  halt  also,  and  to  form,  if 
necessary,  a  second  line  behind  the  cavalry,  by  the  same 
movement  in  a  contrary  way  ;  to  perform  which,  the  two  last 
double  files  halt  and  front,  and  the  otr.  ^rs  wheeling  backward 
to  the  right  and  left,  form  the  line  with  a  front  formed  to  the 
rear  ;  after  which  they  may  be  ordered  in  close  column,  to  be 
directed,  as  occasion  may  require,  in  support  of  the  cavalry. 

Should  there  be  any  defile  at  the  end  of  the  plain,  through 
which  the  cavalry  are  compelled  to  pass  in  the  presence  of 
the  enemy,  they  must  perform  it  with  all  possible  speed,  and 
form  a  line  at  a  small  distance  beyond  it ;  the  artillery  will 
then  follow  ;  while  the  infantry  keeping  up  a  constant  fire, 
will  retire  from  the  right  and  left  wings  by  files,  each  file, 
after  having  fired,  falling  in  the  rear,  in  the  same  manner  as 
is  practised  in  passing  bridges.  The  riflemen  or  light  infantry 
are  to  form  a  rear  guard,  but  should  not  follow  the  main  road; 
they  ought  rather  to  cross  the  woods  or  thickets  at  both  sides, 
by  which  means  they  can,  without  exposing  themselves,  keep 
up  a  cross  fire  upon  the  enemy,  if  he  should  pursue  the  infantry. 

If  the  roads  are  very  go^d  and  broad,  a  skilful  ofiiccr  of 
cavalry  may  be  ordered  to  the  rear  guard  with  a  party  of 
cavalry,  which  he  will  form  in  three  or  five  troops,  accorcing 
to  the  ground  ;  if  he  forms  them  in  three,  the  centre  troop 
will  remain  in  the  second  line  ;  if  in  five,  the  right,  centre 
and  left  troops  will  form  the  first  line.  They  must  advance 
100  or  200  paces  towards  the  enemy,  and  open  their  files,  and 
extend  in  the  manner  practised  by  riflemen,  in  order  to 
skirmish  with  the  enemy  till  the  retreat  is  made  to  join  the 
reserve,  which  must  be  extended  time  enough  in  the  same 
way.  This  may  be  continued  till  the  infantry  has  retreated 
far  enough,  when  the  cavalry  may  join  it  in  full  trot.     This 


vll 


i:i> 


.'Mttvv: 


I! 


i'M 


i' ' 


r  I 


i|  r IV 


tifrni^i 


8S 


riRST  FKINCIFLE8   OF 


movement  may  likewise  be  perlormed  with  two  iincB  con- 
taining  an  equal  number  of  troops,  as  two  or  four  in  each  line. 
If  some  thickets  or  woods  favor  the  light  infantry  or  rifle- 
men, they  may  be  placed  upon  the  wings  of  the  cavalry,  to 
protici  or  follow  its  motions  of  retreat  in  the  same  mjsnner. 

Horse  artillery  and  howitzers  are  chiefly  of  use  when  sup- 
porUng  the  cavalry  by  a  cross  fire.  If  the  country  should  be 
flat  and  open,  and  the  cavalry  are  not  provided  with  them, 
some  cavalry  flankers  may  be  Bent  out  from  both  wings  to 
skirmish  with  the  enemy.  .  ■•  > 

A  Ranker  on  horseback  ought  always  to  observe,  that  when 
he  has  fired  his  rifle  or  one  of  his  pistols  at  the  enemy,  and 
means  to  retreat,  he  should  turn  to  the  left ;  if  it  should  be 
necessary  to  face  again,  on  being  pursued  by  one  of  the 
enemy's  flankers,  he  must  turn  to  the  right,  in  order  to  have 
his  right  arm  at  liberty  to  defend  himself.  If  he  bhould  be 
separated  or  cut  off  from  his  corps  he  must  not  give  himself 
up,  but,  on  the  contrary,  try  to  make  his  way  through  bushes 
and  thickets,  that  he  may  rejoin  his  corps. 

The  flankers  of  the  infantry  may  act  in  conjunction  with 
cavalry  in  the  retreat,  as  well  as  in  any  other  manoeuvre.  If 
the  retreat  should  lie  across  the  plains  or  fields,  the  cavalry 
must  seize  any  favorable  opportunity  to  fall  vigorously  upon 
the  pursuers,  and  thereby  give  the  infantry  time  to  retreat 
in  order  ;  after  having  routed  the  enemy,  they  will  follow 
the  column  and  bring  up  the  rear. 

§  4.  CAVALRY  KIFLEMEN. 

This  description  of  light  troops  is,  in  every  respect,  except^ 
ing  being  mounted,  the  same  ai^  riflemen  on  foot.  They  are 
peculiar  to  the  United  States.  French  Voltiguera  bear  a  close 
resemblance  to  them. 

(i  5.  DUTIES  OF  ADVANCED   GUARDS  AND   OUT  POSTS    OF 
INFANTRY  IN  THE  FIELD. 

Supposing  the  enemy  to  have  eifected  the  disembarkation 
of  a  numerous  body  of  troops,  vi.iich  by  superiority  of  num« 
bcrs,  or  by  surprise,  may  have  been  able  to  drive  back  the 
posts  and  detachments  stationed  along  the  coast,  and  that 
such  dciiichment»  had  a^'uin  juined  the  ntain  body  to  which 
they   belonged :  in   this  case   these  united  divisions   must 


RIFLE  DISCIPLINE. 


•8 


endeavor  to  advance  a{;ainst  the  enemy,  in  order  to  prevent 
his  further  progress  towards  the  interior  of  the  country.  It 
next  becomes  necessary  to  consider  what  conduct  should  be 
pursued  by  the  advanced  guards  and  out  posts  in  reconnoi- 
tring the  roads,  passes  and  defiles  between  them  and  the> 
enemy,  and  preserving  the  communication  between  their  own 
detachments.  Another  important  consideration  is,  in  what 
manner  their  centries  must  be  placed,  in  order  to  prevent 
any  person  going  to  or  coming  from  the  enemy  without 
leave.  The  nature  of  (he  ground  or  extent  of  the  country 
must  determine  whether  these  posts  are  to  consist  of  cavalry 
or  infantry ;  but  the  same  general  rules  will  serve  for  either 
horse  or  foot. 

For  example,  where  there  are  woods  or  thickets,  along  the 
front  towards  the  enemy,  the  infantry  must  line  the  outsides 
of  the  woods,  and  the  cavalry  be  encamped  behind  them  in 
the  plain. 

If,  on  the  contrary,  there  should  be  a  plain  between  the  out 
posts  and  the  enemy  ;  if  such  plain  is  crossed  by  a  river,  by 
rivulets,  canals,  or  marshy  ground,  the  cavalry  may  be  placed 
behind  them,  and  the  infantry  be  posted  behind  the  broken 
bridges,  or  at  openings  through  which  the  enemy  would  most 
probably  endeavor  to  advance. 

If  there  are  villages  inclosed  between  the  out  posts  of  the 
army,  they  cannot  be  guarded  by  cbvalry  ;  therefore  some 
infantry  with  cannon  ought  to  form  the  principal  force,  espe* 
cially  if  these  villages  hava  orchards,  gardens,  or  alleys  of 
trees,  which  cross  them,  and  are  surrounded  by  hedges  or 
walls.  If  a  chain  of  out  posts  is  to  be  formed  along  the 
woods,  every  spot  which  is  much  elevated,  and  evety  salient 
angle,  ought  to  be  occapied  by  a  ccntry  or  two  at  least.  The 
vallies  and  hollow  ways  through  which  the  enemy's  spies  might 
approach,  must  also  be  attended  to  ;  and  if  the  strength  of 
the  out  posts  does  not  allow  of  a  sufficient  number  of  fixed 
sentries,  some  of  them  may  be  ordered  to  keep  moving  from 
one  post  to  another  For  instance,  between  two  fixed  centries, 
one  moving  continually  from  the  right  to  the  left,  and  from 
left  to  right,  may  serve  in&tead  of  two :  this  precaution  is 
peculiarly  necessary  whCi'e  the  inequality  of  the  ground,  or 
any  other  obstacle,  may  prevent  the  centries  from  easily  ceeing 


Is  i 


U  i,.      ! 


m 


n 


V.T} 


i'.'h 


8« 


FIRST  1  aiKCIFLES   OF 


I?   i 


'i 


f  iiiyij 


i ': 


!   1 


^  ilif 

'')l::§l 


each  other.  The  Gentries,  however^  which  are  nearest  to  the 
enemy,  or  upon  any  roads,  ought  to  be  ddubleil. 

About  300  paces,  or  less,  distant  from  each  other,  some 
small  posts  will  be  placed,  according  to  the  ground  ;  each 
commanded  by  a  Serjeant  or  corporal,  and,  if  possible,  in  sight 
of  one  another,  with  a  number  sufficient  to  relieve  four  or  six 
centries  every  two  hours. 

These  out  posts  may  be  changed  every  twelve  hours  if  ne- 
cessary ;  but  this  must  be  done  about  the  evenings  or  at  day 
break  in  the  morning,  the  latter  being  the  most  probable  time 
for  an  attack,  and  the  night  being  improper  for  it.  The 
main  guards,  on  which  three,  or  four,  or  six  small  posts  are 
dependent,  will  always  have  an  officer  or  two  to  defend  them. 

These  main  guards  will  be  placed,  in  preference,  upon  he 
most  important  posts,  roads,  or  openings  of  the  country.  If 
they  cannot  see  one  another,  they  will  sometimes  in  the  day, 
and  often  during  the  night,  send  patrolea  from  one  to  the 
other.  The  eldest  captain  will  therefore  be  placed  in  the 
centre  of  them,  to  receive  the  advices  or  reports  of  the  others. 
The  officer  commanding  at  each  of  these  posts,  must  know 
the  quarters  of  the  general  or  field  officer  of  the  day,  or  of 
the  commanding  officer  named  for  the  out  posts,  if  there  is 
ote,  that  he  may  send  information  to  him,  by  some  orderly 
men  of  the  cavalry,  of  any  matter  of  importance  which  may 
happen  during  the  day  or  night. 

Everv  one  of  these  guards  will  be  covered  by  an  abatis  or 
parap&v,  where  in  some  instances  cannon  may  be  plac<?d, 
especiaUy  \i  the  main  road  leads  to  i'.« 

§  6.  OF  \  IDETTES,  ECLAIREURS,  PATROLES,  CENTINELS  OR 
CENTRIES,  OUT-SCOUTS. 

Ail  these  denominations  may  be  applied  to  military  persons 
of  the  same  description,  to  infantry  or  cavalry,  light  infantry, 
or  riflemen  ;  they  only  describe  the  particular  service  ;  but 
the  particular  term  vidette,  though  it  may  mean  equally  a 
centinel  and  an  eclmreur^  is  generally  applied  only  to  a  centi* 
nel  on  horseback  ;  which  is  also  very  generally  understood  by 
rclaireury  though  the  distinction  between  one  and  the  other, 
consists  in  that  the  videttes  are  fixed  centinels,the  eclaireurs 
may  be  either  fixed  or  occasional  out  scouts :  so  a  pairole 


BIVLE   DISCIPLINE. 


8S 


d  two  or  more 

sight*  nor  more 

a\  not  both  be 

a  s  if  occasion 


may  consist  of  a  body  of  moving  eclaireurs,  or  one  or  two  or 
more  scouts. 

The  term  ecUdreur  has  been  given  to  those  who  have  been 
selected  by  officers  for  their  intelligence  and  steadinetn  {pour 
6elmrer)  to  kee/i  an  eye  on^  to  watch,  lo  obaerve,  to  reconnoitret 
to  guide*    Vidette  had  originally  the  same  signification. 

The  duties  of  centinels  are  understood  under  the  general 
•cheme  of  service  and  guards.  These  few  descriptions  of 
troops,  which  are  usually  selected  men,  ascend  heights,  ex- 
amine passes  and  defiles,  pass  through  villages,  if  required,  to 
obtain  intelligence,  search  thickets,  hollow  ways,  bye  roads, 
woo''s....in  a  word,  see,  hear,  and  examine,  every  thing  neces- 
sary CO  be  known  for  the  purposes  of  military  service  by  an 
officer  acting  offensively  or  defensively. 

Videttes  and  eclaireurs  are  always  de 
together,  with  orders  not  to  separate  ( 
than  one  or  two  hundred  paces,  so  that 
surprized,  that  they  may  know  the  rouus, 
requires,  as  guides. 

When  they  enter  villages,  it  must  be  in  separate  files.  If 
they  meet  an  enemy  by  night,  and  are  compelled  to  fire,  they 
must  act  so  as  to  disconcert  the  enemy  by  a  scattered  and 
reiterated  fire,  constantly  changing  their  own  positions,  and 
acting  still  in  concert  with  their  comrades  ;  and,  if  obliged  to 
retreat,  must  even,  rather  than  be  taken,  make  a  large  circuit 
to  avoid  the  enemy,  and  rejoin  the  next  day.  Videttes,  above 
all  things,  roust  avoid  offending,  much  less  plundering,  the 
people  in  whose  neighborhood  they  are  on  duty.  A  concili- 
atory conduct  is  one  of  their  first  duties ;  they  must  be  mild, 
but  firm....kind  to  strangers,  but  faithful  to  their  command. 
Videttes  are  stationed  on  the  rear  as  well  as  in  advance,  and 
it  is  their  duty  to  report  every  discovery  they  make  to  their 
commander. 

$  7.  ATTACK  OP  A  FORAGE  PARTY  OF  THE  ENEMY. 

As  the  security  of  an  army  or  a  camp,  will  in  a  great  mea- 
sure depend  on  the  vigilance  and  intelligence  of  advanced 
guards  and  patroles  ;  they  must  be  always  impressed  with  a 
sense  of  the  importance  of  thr  trust  reposed  in  their  honor 
and  courage.  An  imaginary  security  has  been  often  too  fatal. 


w 


V) 


s  u 


f  ^_. 


tv-- 


^ 


'/, 


7 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


1.1 


■^  l&i   12.2 
2.0 


IIS 

III 

u 


■4.0 


11.25 


U    ILd 


I 


PhotDgFafM] 

Sciences 

Carporatton 


// 


// 


>..^^ 


./.^ 


A* 


::^ 


^ 


L1>^ 


v 


<^ 


■\ 


33  WIST  MAIN  STMIT 

WIUTIIt,N.Y.  USSO 

(71«)a7a-4S03 


o^ 


se 


irittST  tRINCIFLES  OF 


!  r 


■  j   !^ 


r 


Mil 


....The  example  of  Paulding^  WilUams^  and  Vanwertt  the  im 
mortal  American  militia  men,  can  never  be  too  frequently 
related  and  impressed  upon  the  minds  of  Americans.  Nor 
can  the  seizure  of  general  Lee  by  the  strataf;em  of  the  enemy 
be  too  often  noticed  as  a  precaution.  The  gallant  exterprise 
of  colonU  Barton,  of  the  Rhode  Island  militia,  in  seizing  the 
British  general  Prescot,  should  be  kept  before  the  minds  of 
those  who  embark  in  gallant  enterprises ;  and  an  officer  in 
his  military  reading,  which  ought  to  be  the  leisure  occupa- 
tion of  every  officer,  will  find  numerous  matters  of  precaution 
as  well  as  of  counsel  in  gallant  undertakings. 

The  prince  of  Hesse  Philipsthal,  who  commanded  a  corps 
of  Prussians  in  the  Silesian  war,  had  relied  too  much  on  hia. 
supposed  security  ;  but  general  Wurmaer^  well  known  in  the 
war  of  the  French  revolution,  was  too  vigilant  for  the  Prus- 
sian, he  surprised  and  carried  him  off. 

It  should  be  ever  kept  in  mind  by  an  officer  who  is  entrusted 
with  an  advanced  guard  or  a  patrol,  that  the  very  best  soldiers 
are  often  negligent  in  bad  weather ;  and  that  the  enemy's 
officers  also  know  it.  Good  discipline,  however,  will  over- 
come this;  and  a  good  tempered  and  well  disposed  officer, 
who  does  not  mistake  indolence  and  arrogance  for  duty,  will 
always  find  in  the  good  disposition  and  pride  of  the  soldier, 
the  sure  means  of  enforcing  discipline  and  duty,  in  such  situ- 
ations, without  resorting  to  severity,  unless  in  an  extreme 
case.  In  European  armies  negligence  in  a  vidette  is 
punished  with  death  ;  because,  on  the  negligence  of  a  vidette 
may  depend  the  fate  of  an  army,  a  campaign,  or  a  nation. 
C'ases  arise  in  which,  therefore,  the  heaviest  punishment 
cannot  but  be  infiicted  as  a  measure  of  example,  and  to  guard 
against  surprizes. 

During  a  high  wind,  a  snow  storm,  or  a  fog,  enterprizcs 
are  ofien  undertaken  by  active  officers.  To  counteract  them 
a  like  activity  is  required  on  the  part  of  the  officer  of  every 
corps.  When  the  wind  blows  towards  a  post,  the  officer  on. 
that  post  should  take  it  as  a  warning  to  become  vigilant 
whether  it  rains  or  snows,  and  if  it  is  during  the  night,  double 
care  must  be  taken  and  double  preparation  made.  The  de- 
struction of  the  American  troops  at  PaoU  and  the  Billcty  and 
the  massacres  at  Egg  Harbori  during  the  revolution,  could 


HF  "'-  — 


RIFLE  DISCIPXINiB. 


87 


not  have  been  accomplished,  had  there  been  a  good  look  out 
by  videttes  ;  or  had  due  precaution  been  taken  to  watch 
traitors  and  disaffected  persons.  Alarms  being  given  fre- 
quently by  an  enemy  without  any  actual  attack  following, 
should  not  be  considered  as  an  indication  of  attack  being 
relinquished ;  the  alarms  may  have  been  purposely  nume« 
rous,  in  order  to  lull  into  a  false  security,  and  to  attack  at  a 
time  little  expected.  Corps  of  American  cavalry  have  fre- 
quently entered  the  lines  of  the  enemy,  during  the  revolution) 
after  repeated  false  attacks,  and  carried  off  horses  and  bag* 
gage.  This  has  been  effected  in  noon  day  on  some  occasions. 

It  is  not  to  be  supposed  that  at  home,  where  magazines  may 
be  removed  towards  the  interior  of  the  country,  and  secured 
in  time  against  any  invasion,  that  the  army  may  be  obliged 
to  forage  in  order  to  get  provision  for  their  horses.  Such  an 
undertaking  will  rather  be  necessary  to  an  army  endeavoring 
to  invade  the  country,  and  who,  not  having  been  able  to 
transport  by  sea  every  requisite,  will  be  .driven  to  it  by  neces- 
sity, not  regarding  the  ruin  of  inhabitants  or  the  land.  It  is 
therefore  useful  to  know  how  to  prevent  the  enemy  from 
succeeding  in  so  essential  an  object. 

A  general  or  field  officer  being  ordered  to  attack  the 
enemy's  chain  of  foragers,  will,  in  the  first  place,  examine  his 
dispositions,  and  chiefly  endeavor  to  discover  where  most  of 
the  enemy's  reserve  troops  are  placed. 

Having  reconnoitred  the  weakest  part  of  the  enemy's  chain, 
he  will  station  his  own  reserve,  under  cover  of  some  elevated 
ground,  where  the  enemy  may  not  expect  it,  and  from  whence 
the  officer  commanding  it  may  be  able  to  overlook  the  success 
of  the  vanguard,  to  judge  of  it,  and  to  make  a  steady  and 
effectual  attack  upon  the  enemy  where  the  line  is  most  ex< 
posed,  or  where  it  may  be  mo'st  easily  broken  and  routed. 

Should  the  vanguard  succeed  inanypointoftiie  attack  what- 
ever  (which  is  very  probable  if  conducted  by  a  skilful  and  re- 
solute ofllcer,  who  possesses  the  confidence  of  his  troops)  this 
vanguard  will  then  be  immediately  followed  by  a  body  of  rifle- 
men and  select  infantry,  supported  by  a  sufficient  number  of 
skirmishers  belonging  to  the  light  cavalry, in  order  to  mingle 
with  the  foragers  and  throw  them  into  such  confusion  as  may 
prevent  their  rallying  again  for  the  remainder  of  the  duy. 


*:     M 


mi! 


h  • 


'^ 


u 

J' 


!! 


-^T-*^ 


-7^'' 


J      i3F,.- 


»:r 


! !)  4  i 


'  '., 


i !!  m 


b 


h. 


ts 


flSST  PBIKCIFLES  OF 


The  first  body  of  the  reserve,  however,  must  follow  up  this 
brisk  attack  in  good  order,  and  should  be  commanded  by  a 
prudent  officer,  who  will  keep  a  watchful  eye  upon  the 
enemy,  and  be  ready  to  attack  his  reserve,  which  will  doubt' 
less  support  its  own  troops  if  possible.  The  riflemen  and 
light  cavalry  must  give  the  enemy  no  time  to  pause,  but 
harrass  them  by  constant  attacks  directed  through  their 
centre,  in  order  to  keep  them  in  continual  confusion. 

The  second  line  of  reserve  may  be  drawn  up  in  a  single 
rank,  and  thereby  appear  to  the  enemy  a  greater  force  than 
it  really  is ;  and  be  prepared  either  to  complete  the  rout,  or 
to  rally  its  own  riflemen  and  the  skirmishers  of  cavalry, 
which  may  have  been  formed  either  from  a  part  of  the  whole 
or  the  whole  of  the  second  line. 

If  the  iirst  attack  made  by  the  riflemen,  flankers,  or  skir- 
mishers, should  fail,  they  must  be  rallied  by  the  second  body 
of  reserve,  and  an  entire  fresh  rank  of  cavalry  sent  to  renew 
the  attack  with  greater  fury.  Experience  having  often 
proved  that  although  a  first  attack  may  have  been  repulsed, 
a  second  will  annoy  the  enemy  much  more,  and  sometimes 
become  much  more  effectual  than  the  former. 

The  chief  object,  however,  must  be  to  prevent  the  forage 
from  being  completed,  and  to  rout  the  enemy's  foragers  in 
such  a  m  jiner  that  they  cannot  reassemble.  If  the  cavalry 
should  fall  in  with  them  before  they  have  separated  to  begin 
their  work,  there  will  be  no  harm  in  beginning  the  attack 
immediately  ;  but  cavalry  going  out  to  attack  a  foraging  party 
ought  to  avoid  passing  through  villages  or  woods,  where  the 
enemy  may  have  laid  an  ambuscade. 

§  8.  DUTY  OF  AN  OFFICER  OF  LIGHT  TROOPS,  DETACHED  IN 
FRONT  OF  THE  LINE  BEFORE  AN  ENGAGEMENT. 

An  officer  of  light  troops '.  c  nd  in  front  of  the  line  of  the 
army  (at  the  very  moment  waen  the  enemy  meditates  an 
attack)  whether  to  cover  an  important  manoeuvre  or  a  deploy- 
ment, will  first  receive  clear  orders  from  the  general  com- 
manding. His  own  discretion  must  determine  how  far  he 
ought  to  advance  in  front  of  the  line,  according  to  what  kind 
of  troops  the  enemy  may  offer  to  his  view.  His  conduct 
must  also  be  regulated  by  the  nature  of  the  ground ;  if 


t 


„.^-'-v.. 


BIVLE  DISCIFLUTB. 


89 


cavalry  with  flankers  are  opposed  to  hiiD)  he  will  be  cautious 
that  hit  retreat  be  not  cut  off.  He  will  form  his  chain  of 
riflemen  in  the  best  manner,  and  will  station  several  small 
parties  in  reserve  behind  him,  in  order  to  support  his  ad- 
vanced platoon,  or  to  relieve  them  when  their  ammunition 
is  nearly  exhausted.  /    .  r;-^  '? 

When  the  commander  of  the  line  begins  to  open  a  fire  of 
artillery,  or  has  completed  his  manoeuvre,  he  will  give  a 
signal  for  the  officer  commanding  the  riflemen  tc  fall  back 
(which  must  be  done  quietly,  and  with  steadiness  and  good 
order)  by  the  sound  of  the  bugle,  as  is  usual  with  light  troops. 

If  the  officer  of  riflemen  should  be  ordered  to  cover  the 
movement  of  a  body  of  horse,  he  ought,  during  its  attack,  to 
profit  of  every  cover  which  thickets  or  bushes  may  afford 
him,  to  gain  the  flank  of  the  enemy's  cavalry,  and  if  it  be 
routed,  to  pursue  it  in  the  same  manner. 

Should  circumstances  render  it  impossible  for  him  to  avoid 
being  attacked  by  &  body  of  cavalry,  he  will  form  his  men  in 
two  ranks  at  close  order,  and  form  a  crotchet  or  potence  on 
each  wing,  in  which  position  he  will  wait  for  the  enemy,  the 
front  rank  presenting  bayonets :  should  the  enemy  advance 
to  the  charge,  the  rear  rank  only  will  fire  at  the  instant  he  is 
at  twenty-five  paces  distance ;  the  front  rank  will  then  fire  in 
the  face  of  the  enemy's  cavalry,  and  after  that  present  their 
bayonets  to  his  horses.  It  will,  however,  be  much  better  to 
form  in  three  rsaks  when  thus  opposed  by  cavalry,  and  to 
keep  the  fire  of  the  third  rank  in  reserve.  These  remarks 
are  only  intended  to  remind  an  officer  commanding  riflemen 
of  the  cautions  which  are  requisite  when  acting  against  ca- 
valry ;  and  to  evince  the  necessity  of  keeping  his  men  within 
such  a  distance  of  each  other,  that  he  may  be  able  to  reas> 
semble  them  in  time,  and  the  propriety  of  having  a  reserve 
behind  him,  to  form  a  third  rank,  in  case  it  should  be  wanted. 
A  rank  of  pikes  to  oppose  cavalry  in  such  a  position,  would 
be  powerfully  effective.  '         .;:  *  ' 

Should  an  officer,  commanding  some  troops  of  light  caval> 
ry,  be  ordered  to  cover  an  attack  made  in  a  plain  by  a  body 
of  cavalry ;  in  this  case,  when  the  first  line  appears  to  have 
succeeded  in  the  attack,  the  first  flank  troop  of  cavalry  may 
follow,  and  the  officer  covering  the  flank  of  the  second  line 


|v  ! 
ill  \ 

1 


•    ;' 


1   ! 


'  'I  i\ 


■i-: 


I, 

p  i 


V 


t 


^ 


riM 


90 


FIB8T  PBINCIFIES   OF 


■I    ' 


;r.s 


.k-: 


'  «i 


i'-J\ 


1/     '      \ 


may  do  the  same,  provided  the  enemy  has  no  second  line ; 
in  which  case,  he  ought  to  be  exceedingly  cautious,  and  keep 
at  least  half  of  his  men  in  reserve,  that  he  may  not  be  out* 
flanked  himself.  If  the  enemy  succeeds  in  out-flanking  the 
first  line,  the  officer  who  covers  the  second  will  make  every 
exertion  to  fall  upon  his  wings,  and  to  throw  him  into  disor- 
der, by  a  bold  and  rapid  manoeuvre.  // 

The  best  way  of  covering  a  body  of  cavalry  which  stands  in 
line,  is  to  have  one  of  its  wings  protected  by  a  wood,  which 
is  entrenched,  or  lined  with  light  infantry  and  cannon.  The 
horse  artillery  may  likewise  be  of  infinite  use  to  secure  the 
other  wing ;  especially  if  it  can  be  placed  behind  some  ele- 
vated ground,  and  so  disposed  as  to  fire  in  an  oblique  direc- 
tion on  the  enemy's  flank. 

§  9.  OF  ESCORTING  A  CONVOY 


■Mil 


t^Hu 


J- 


•  The  escort  of  a  convoy  is  commonly  divided  into  three 
parts ;  one  at  the  bead,  one  at  the  centre,  and  one  at  the  rear ; 
besides  which,  two  armed  soldiers  may  be  placed  at  the  side 
of  each  waggon,  to  watch  the  conduct  of  the  drivers,  prevent 
purloining  of  stores,  Sec. 

Such  escorts  are  seldom  composed  of  cavalry,  except  when 
the  country  through  which  the  convoy  is  to  proceed,  is  level 
and  open ;  in  which  case,  some  cavalry  will  of  course  be  or- 
dered to  precede  the  convoy,  cover  the  flanks,  or  form  a  rear 
guard,  and  to  attack  an  enemy  on  every  side  who  may  attempt 
to  stop  the  march  of  the  convoy. 

To  pursue  an  enemy  very  far,  in  such  service,  would  be 
imprudent,  lest  it  should  be  a  stratagem  of  the  enemy  to  draw 
off*  the  escort,  and  in  the  mean  time  attack  the  convoy,  whose 
march  should  be  continued,  if  possible.  For  this  reason, 
cavalry  is  useful  to  ascertain  the  exact  number  of  the  enemy, 
and  whether  he  is  in  sufficient  force  to  be  dangerous,  or  only 
comes  to  reconnoitre  the  march. 

A  convoy  having  a  van  and  rear  guard,  with  patroles  of 
cavalry  upon  its  flanks,  and  the  commanding  officer  disco- 
vering, either  by  means  of  his  scouts,  or  from  his  own  cbser- 
vaiion,  that  the  enemy  is  within  a  couple  of  miles,  and  pre- 
paring to  attack  him  with  both  infantry  and  cavalry,  will,  if, 
the  roads  be  narrow,  and  the  country  full  of  woods  (begin- 


\ 


BIVLB  DISOIPLIini.   ' 


91 


ning  only  at  the  head),  turn  the  first  waggon  round  towards 
the  second,  so  that  the  head  of  the  fore  horse  may  be  brought 
close  to  the  other  waggon :  and  as  the  rennainder  continues 
to  advance,  every  odd  number  will  be  turned  with  its  front 
from  the  enemy.  If,  for  example,  the  escort  of  the  convoy 
consist  of  200  men,  and  the  waggons  50  in  number,  the  whole 
will  occupy  from  900  to  1000  paces  before  the  waggons  are 
turned  in  the  manner  above  described.  But  after  that,  the 
extent  from  front  to  rear  will  be  only  between  150  and  160 
paces,  and  the  last  waggon  will  of  course  have  more  than  750 
paces  to  advance  to  its  place. 

If  the  country  be  rather  open,  or  the  road  broad,  and  the 
convoy  more  numerous  than  that  stated  above  (consisting,  for 
instance,  of  100  waggons  or  more),  and  it  is  apprehended  that 
an  attack  will  be  made  before  they  can  have  time  to  close,  they 
must  be  stopped  just  at  the  centre ;  and  a  fourth  part  of  the 
waggons  from  the  front,  with  another  fourth  part  from  the 
rear,  ordered  to  close  up  to  the  centre,  so  as  to  form  two  pa- 
rallel lines  of  waggons,  with  the  horses  turned  hatf  one  way 
and  half  the  other;  between  these  the  infantry  will  be  placed 
to  act  as  riflemen,  if  there  are  no  other  riRemen  with  the 
party.  The  cavalry  may  be  divided  in^o  two  parts,  of  two 
troops  each ;  one  troop  in  the  front,  one  on  each  side,  and 
one  in  the  rear. 

It  has  been  already  observed,  that  at  least  two  armed  sol- 
diers are  necessary  to  each  waggon,  to  prevent  confusion.  Sec. 
to  see  that  the  drivers  do  not  on  the  first  alarm  cut  the  traces, 
and  make  off  with  the  horses,  and  also  to  assist  in  turning 
them  inwards,  and  bringing  the  waggons  close  to  each  other. 
It  would  likewise  be  of  great  service  to  order  a  couple  of  ar- 
tillery waggons  at  the  head  of  the  convoy,  and  at  the  rear, 
each  carrying  a  dozen  of  chevaux  de  frize,  constructed  with 
hinges  to  fold  up,  and  which  could  be  easily  opened  again. 
Such  chevaux  de  fiize  being  eight  or  nine  feet  long  each, 
would  nearly  cover  the  front,  rear,  and  flanks  of  the  convoy ; 
and  would  serve  as  a  parapet,  behind  which  the  infantry  of 
the  van  and  rear  guard  will  be  enabled  to  make  a  strong  re- 
sistance, placing  their  canuon  (if  they  have  any)  on  each  side. 

There  is  another  method  sometimes  adopted,  which  is  to 
form  an  ordinary  square,  turning  the  heads  of  all  the  horses 


i 

I 


'       'I 


rif 


I 


i| 


m 


§ 


1 


H^; 


I 


i  ;l 


1,1 


/' 


'i'lii 


^11  i 


h^  i  I     « 


u     !i 


if       ■* 


IV 


^  flHST  PRIKCIP£SS   OF 

inwards,  and  the  backs  of  the  waggons  outwards.  This  is 
very  proper,  if  the  convoy  is  to  pass  a  night  in  a  plain  {  but 
to  do  this  efiectually,  it  will  be  necessary  to  go  out  of  the 
road,  and  will  take  a  long  time  either  to  form  'he  square,  or 
to  put  the  convoy  in  motion  next  morning ;  and  as  the  enemy 
will  not  always  give  sufficient  time  to  perform  this  manoeu^ 
vre,  the  attempting  it  may  create  confusion. 

It  may  be  hardly  necessary  to  mention,  that  before  the 
convoy  sets  off,  every  driver  ought  to  be  provided  with  a 
pail  or  bucket  to  water  his  horses,  and  with  oats  in  propor- 
tion to  circumstances. 

If  the  commander  of  a  convoy  has  occasion  to  pass  through 
a  narrow  passage  or  defile,  he  will  send  a  troop  of  horse 
some  time  before  him,  to  take  post  at  the  farther  end  of  it, 
and  also  some  patroles  to  examine  the  ground  on  each  side 
for  the  security  of  the  flanks.  Small  detachments  from  the 
main  guard  should  likewise  be  advanced  about  three  miles 
in  front,  before  he  enters  the  defile,  which  he  ought  not  to 
do  until  he  is  certain  that  he  can  pass  it  with  safety.  While 
the  patrole  is  sent  out,  he  can  (if  there  is  a  plain  before  the 
defile)  draw  up  his  waggons  in  two  rows ;  and  after  his  van 
guard  has  passed  the  defile  and  sent  forward  to  reconnoitre, 
then  his  centre  will  begin  to  move,  followed  by  a  row  of  wag- 
gons. The  rear  guard,  which  remains  behind,  will  order  the 
second  row  to  follow  the  Grst,  very  close,  and  seeing  that  it 
is  not  pursued  by  an  enemy,  will  close  the  march. 

If  a  waggon  break  down,  it  must  be  drawn  on  one  <iide  ; 
the  most  valuable  part  of  its  load  may  be  put  on  horses,  or 
dititributed  among  the  other  waggons ;  but  every  exertion 
must  be  made  to  prevent  the  march  being  stopped  by  the 
accident ;  it  such  a  mi&fortune  cannot  be  avoided,  the  front 
should  halt  a  moment  rather  than  break  the  line. 

When  night  comes  on,  the  commander  of  the  convoy  will 
form  a  double  row  or  square  of  his  waggons  in  an  open  place, 
not  too  far  from  the  water,  nor  too  near  to  a  village ;  and  will 
place  his  guards  or  outposts  on  the  roads,  avenues,  and  ele- 
vated grounds ;  the  remainder  of  his  men  being  encamped  at 
each  end,  and  upon  the  flanks  of  the  convoy.  Should  any 
part  of  this  consist  of  ammunition,  every  precaution  must  be 
taken  to  prevent  accidents  by  fire,        ^,^.:.,-    ,....,  ,     .   ;, . 


1    V. 


/'... 


\' 


:i 


This  is 
lin;  but 
it  of  the 
uarC}  or 
e  enemy 
manoeu- 

Tore  the 

I  with  a 

propor- 

through 
of  horse 
ind  of  it, 
iach  side 
from  the 
'ee  miles 
ht  not  to 
While 
efore  the 
r  his  van 
;onnoitrei 
vf  of  wag- 
order  the 
ng  that  it 

)ne  >iide ; 
lorses,  or 

exertion 
ed  by  the 

the  front 

tnvoy  will 
pen  place, 
;  and  will 
I  and  ele- 
;amped  at 
lould  any 
1  must  be 


BIIXE  DISCIPXINB. 


93 


If  there  should  be  a  narrow  pass  or  defile  in  his  route,  near 
where  he  intends  to  halt,  the  commanding  officer  will  endea- 
vor to  pass  it  before  night,  that  he  may,  if  possible,  have  it 
in  his  rear.  Every  one,  even  every  private  soldier,  who  has 
the  care  of  or  conducts  a  waggon,  ought  to  be  instructed  in 
this  part  of  bis  duty  by  his  commanding  officer. 


;.i3u 


§  10.  OP  THE  ATTACK  OF  A  CONVOY. 

An  officer  who  is  ordered  to  attack  a  convoy  will  go  him- 
self with  a  strong  patrole  or  proper  escort,  and  reconnoitre 
the  enemy's  motions  and  number,  avoiding  being  discovered 
by  him  if  possible. 

The  more  numerous  the  convoy  is,  and  the  more  extensive 
the  space  it  occupies,  so  much  greater  will  be  the  probability 
of  the  attack  proving  successful.  Some  general  rules  are 
therefore  to  be  considered. 

In  the  first  place,  it  is  necessary  to  examine  on  which  side 
the  convoy  could  be  supported  by  the  enemy,  in  order  to  at- 
tack it  on  the  opposite  side  ^  unless  the  officer  commanding 
the  attack  has  sufficient  force  to  place  a  strong  body  of  troops 
between  the  convoy  and  the  enemy,  and  is  certain  of  being 
able  to  keep  him  off  by  that  means  until  he  has  effected  his 
purpose.    . 

If  the  escort  of  a  convoy  be  in  three  divisions,  one  at  the 
head,  another  at  the  centre,  and  the  third  in  the  rear;  the 
ground  and  nature  of  the  country  through  which  it  has  to 
pass,  will  determine  which  of  these  parts  should  be  attacked 
by  choice. 

If  the  attack  is  directed  towards  the  head,  a  detachment 
ought  to  be  sent  round  to  annoy  the  troops  in  the  cent'^e  and 
rear  of  the  escort,  and  prevent  them  from  advancing  io  '^up- 
port  those  in  front ;  and  the  slow  pace  of  the  convoy  will  give 
plenty  of  time  to  adopt  this  measure.  When  the  command- 
ing officer  perceives,  by  firing  at  the  centre,  and  In  the  rear 
of  the  convoy,  that  his  detachments  are  engaged  with  the 
enemy,  he  will  fall  upon  the  troops  at  the  head  with  the  re- 
mainder of  his  forces,  and  having  succeeded  in  routing  them, 
will  order  half  his  men  to  pursue  them,  during  which  the 
other  half  will  destroy  and  burn  the  waggons,  having  first  cut 
the  traces,  and  sent  the  horses  away  in  charge  of  a  small  party. 


=;; 


1^ 


m 


11  i 

1  ^ 
)  I'  ' 


I 


m 


I 


r\ 


■i\ 


;■     ( 

1 

1 

; 

U' 


ll: 


UI^M 


94- 


YIRST   PRIirCIPLES   OV 


No  time  must  be  lost ;  and  if  any  reinforcement  to  the  enemy 
should  come  up,  the  horses  which  cannot  be  brought  avaj 
must  be  destroyed,  and  the  waggons  broken ;  those  contain* 
ing  ammunition  may  be  blown  up.  *  '*''^  ..737.;     /i/svf  ■>:'  -r- 

If  from  the  nature  of  the  road,  or  other  local  circumstan- 
ces, it  should  be  deemed  most  eligible  to  attack  the  convoy 
in  the  centre,  and  cut  it  in  two,  in  order  to  carry  away  the 
foremost  waggons,  and  destroy  the  remainder,  the  greatest 
confusion  may  be  occasioned  in  it  by  means  of  a  superior 
number  of  riflemen.  The  commanding  officer  ought  there- 
fore to  Bfiultiply  his  attacks,  by  dismounting  a  number  of  his 
cavalry,  if  the  country  is  not  too  level,  and  ordering  them  to 
act  as  riflemen.  In  some  instances,  a  detachment  of  riflemen 
may  act  as  voltigeurat  that  is,  they  may  be  mounted  behind 
the  horsemen,  10  annoy  the  enemy's  force  in  various  parts, 
and  spread  terror  and  disorder  through  the  whole  line,  both 
of  the  escort  and  convoy. 

The  above  method  of  attacking  a  convoy  on  all  sides  with 
light  infantry  and  cavalry  intermixed,  will  succeed  the  best 
when  the  enemy  is  confined  in  a  narrow  pass,  or  the  country 
abounds  with  woods.  In  a  plain,  or  an  open  country,  some 
horse  artillery,  or  a  couple  of  howitzers,  will  do  great  exe< 
cution  i  and  both  destroy  the  waggons  and  throw  the  drivers 
and  escort  into  the  most  terrible  and  unavoidable  confusion, 
especially  if  the  attack  with  cavalry,  acting  as  skirmishers, 
with  a  good  number  of  riflemen  between  them,  be  vigorously 
repeated,  and  accompanied  by  loud  shouts  and  a  dreadful 
noise ;  and  if  it  has  been  possible  in  some  part  of  the  ground, 
where  there  are  woods  or  thick  bushes,  to  conceal  an  am- 
buscade, which  cannot  be  discovered  by  the  patroles  of  the 
enemy. 


t«    *  •r^" 


.  f  nf 


.)..,'  ---i 


- r      .-(■';  .«r 


If  «.      .   ;< 


r  i  ',■'  ' 


M?;   '\'i 


:■  ..fi  "i-:  ■-..■>.:■    -v:    :  , 


15.     i"--!  ,-«<.-*'j^j 


I  !; 


ItlVLE  DISCIPLimS. 


95 


.t 


ait> 


.1   ilif.    Hi 


,.r    ,iW    "■. '' 


.i>t^:f.V.v.:,*P'f^2»,'fA.':      CHAP.   VIII. 


■•;^  •  t'^r. 


-/.   / 


'    '         '  ^  1.  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  RIFLE. 

X  HE  superiority  of  the  rifle  consists  in  carrying  the  ball 
with  more  directness  to  the  object  aimed  at,  than  the  smooth 
barrel ;  this  is  attributable  te  the  action  of  the  atmosphere 
upon  the  ball,  after  it  is  exploded  from  the  muzzle  of  the 
piece,  which  operates  differently  on  the  line  of  direction  and 
the  manner  of  the  motion  of  the  ball.  The  smooth  barrel 
throws  the  ball  in  such  a  manner  that  its  motion  resembles 
that  of  the  wheel  of  a  carriage,  which  constantly  turns  on  an 
axis  of  its  own,  and  still  proceeds  along  a  prolongued  line  ; 
while  the  ball  of  the  rifled  barrel,  being  indented  or  channel* 
ed  by  the  grooves  of  the  barrel,  proceeds  not  like  the  wheel 
of  the  carriage  rolling  forward ;  but  in  a  spiral  direction,  or 
in  a  path  resembling  the  motion  of  a  cork>screw  forced  hori- 
zontally forward.  The  course  of  the  smooth  ball  is  also 
considerably  deflected  above  the  horizontal  line  of  the  barrel 
when  aim  is  taken,  so  considerably  that  it  becomes  necessary 
to  aim  lower  than  the  level  line  when  the  objects  are  near, 
and  to  aim  higher  than  the  level  line  when  beyond  a  given 
distance;  but  though  there  is  some  elevation  of  the  rifle  ball 
in  its  course,  it  is  yet  relatively  so  small  that  it  is  not  requir- 
ed  to  aim  lower  than  the  object  at  any  distance,  though  when 
at  a  considerable  distance,  say  500  to  700  yards,  it  is  neces> 
sary  to  take  a  higher  aim,  in  order  to  countervail  the  power 
of  gravity  upon  the  weight  of  the  ball.  The  operation  of  the 
air  upon  a  rifle  ball,  will  be  clearly  understood,  by  viewing 
the  spiral  motion  of  an  arrfvf,  which  has  three  feathered 
wings;  the  air  passing  belweei)  the  feathers  causes  the  arrow 
to  spirl  along  or  move  like  a  screw  ;  the  same  eiTcct  is  pro« 
duced  by  the  impression  made  in  the  sides  of  a  bullet  by  the 
grooves  of  the  rifle.  ,       ,  ^^  .v- z^.  . 

§  2.  OF  LOADING. 

Some  hold  that  a  quantity  of  powder  equal  to  three  times 

the  full  of  the  mould  in  which  the  ball  is  cast,  is  the  proper 

charge  ;  others  four  times  the  full  of  the  mould  ;  on  this  plan 

a  ball  of  twenty  to  the  pound  would  he  fired  with  nearly  a 


:i 


It! 


r 


*  H 


( 


u 


i   'K 


m 


f 


I 


# 


VIRST  PRUrCIPLES  OF 


>!' 


fourth  of  the  weight  of  the  btll.  But  some  say  that  one  third 
of  the  weightof  the  ball  is  not  too  much;  experience  shews  that 
to  shoot  at  350  to  300  yardsi  one  fourth  or  a  fifth  is  enough. 

The  backwoodsmen  of  the  western  frontier,  place  the  ball  in 
the  palm  of  their  left  hand,  and  cupping  the  hand  as  much  as 
possible,  cover  the  ball  with  powder,androake  that  their  charge. 

The  ball  should  be  just  of  that  size  as  to  rest  on  the  grooves, 
and  require  not  much  trouble  to  force  it  down,  but  yet  not  to 
pass  without  being  forced. 

The  grooves  should  not  be  cut  too  deep. 


§  3.   CLEANING  THE  RU'LE. 


'trf:  , 


The  greatest  care  should  be  taken  in  preserving  the  interior 
of  the  barrel  clean,  and  the  lock. ...careful  shooters  wipe  out 
with  flannel  or  a  clean  cotton  rag,  at  every  8  or  10  shots,  others 
20;  no  iron  instruments  should  be  used  in  cleaning;  the 
spiral  brush  of  hog's  bristles  should  be  used  to  scour  with  hot 
water ;  the  woollen  brush  composed  of  layers  of  wool,  alter* 
nately  placed  across  the  openings  of  a  piece  of  hickory,  split 
four  times  to  a  length  of  about  six  inches ;  the  ends  of  the 
wool  make  an  excellent  brush.  After  washing  clean  and 
drying,  the  inside  should  be  lightly  touched  with  good  oil. 

\.;   .   w    ..         §  4.  LOCK.  >   ,.,,... 

The  lock  of  the  rifle  should  be  of  the  best  kind.  It  is 
a  great  extravagance  and  waste  to  provide  rifles  without 
locks  of  the  best  workmanship,  for  they  should  not  only  be 
made  so  well  as  to  go  off*  easy,  but  to  last  and  endure  severe 
service.  The  best  marksman  cannot  preserve  a  just  level, if 
he  is  obliged  to  tug  with  his  finger  at  a  trigger  restrained  by 
a  spring  unnecessarily  stiff;  nor  can  there  be  safety  in  move- 
ment if  the  workmanship  be  so  bad  as  to  leave  no  certainty 
whether  it  will  fire  or  not.  The  rifle  lock  should  have  a 
check  bolt  upon  the  cock  to  prevent  accidents,  and  this  bolt 
should  be  set  when  after  firing  they  come  to  half  cock,  the 
pan  shut  while  loading. 

The  furniture  and  barrel  of  the  rifle  should  neither  of  them 
be  bright,  a  glaze  made  of  camphor  should  be  gently  brushed 
over  them  after  a  proper  cleaning,  and  this  glaze  would 
resist  weather  apd  prevent  rust  or  glare. 


BmS  DISOiniNE* 


97 


V  5.  GUN.POWDER. 

The  chief  difficulty  with  powder  is  to  \  c*  nt  its  becoming 
damp  from  the  atmosphere ;  it  should  the> .  rare  be  kept  in  • 
ressel  perfectly  close— and  the  charge  should  be  encreased  in 
damp  weather— the  powder  should  be  of  even  gruns ;  and  if  not 
mix  it  well.  Glazed  powder  is  not  so  liable  to  be  affected  by 
damp.  Chargers  should  be  very  small  at  the  nose,  or  where 
the  finger  presses. 

§  6.  THE  PATCH, 

Is  a  small  piece  of  green  shammey)  or  buck  skiU}  or  kid  skuij 
put  round  the  ball  before  forcing  it  into  the  barrel....care  should 
be  taken  it  be  not  too  thick  and  defeat  its  purpose....itis  used  to 
take  off  from  the  windage)  to  retain  the  air»  and  the  grease  is 
used  to  facilitate  the  passage  of  the  ball  by  ^minishing  the 
friction. 

A  method  has  been  usefully  resorted  to  of  providing  a  punch 
made  of  steel)  which  by  means  of  a  hollow  barrel  equal  to  the 
calibre,  cut  either  /lat  or  leather  pieced  to  serve  as  wads,  which 
are  forced  down  immediately  on  the  powder,  after  the  powder 
is  levelled  well  by  a  stroke  of  the  but  against  the  ground.  This 
punch  is  made  in  the  manner  of  those  punches  used  by  sad- 
dlers to  cut  large  holes  in  stirrup  leathers,  &c. ;  hats,  leather 
of  all  kinds,  even  linen,  cotton  or  woollen  cloth,  or  paper,  might 
be  cut  with  this  punch  with  great  advantage  for  wads ;  the  ball 
should  be  laid  over  this  kind-  of  wad,  and  followed  by  another 
well  forced  in,  when  it  is  intended  to  march  loaded. 

S  7.  TO  PRESERVE  THE  RIFLE  FROM  RUST. 

It  must  be  obvious  that  the  rifle  barrel  should  not  be 
bright ;  that  the  equipments  of  riflemen  should  be  free  from 
every  thing  that  is  glittering  or  of  a  striking  color,  must  be 
perceived  upon  every  consideration  of  their  duties.  Great 
care,  however,  must  be  taken,  in  the  frequent  inspection  of  the 
rifle,  to  guard  against  any  neglect  of  keeping  it  in  order,  when 
it  has  been  browned,  greened,  or  blacked. 

The  barrel  may  be  secured  against  external  rust,  by  the 
following  means  :....If  it  be  intended  to  give  the  barrel  a  clean 
black  color,  take  half  an  ounce  of  camfihor,  a  gill  of  oil  of 
turpentine,  a  gill  of  Florence  oil,  and  a  clean  earthen  cupi 
simmer  them  over  a  fire  without  flame,  until  the  whole  shall 
be  incorporated,  and  in  an  uniform  liquid  state,  putting  the 
ramphor  in  last ;  add  to  this  liquid  an  ounce  of  clean  white  bcfs 

o 


'I 


II 


t 

!1 


i 


!i   ■ 


i: 


I.. 


1. 


d: 


'^     ■■  1         ' 

i   ll.     , 

1  m.'  ■ 

1 1 ; 

W 

U      I 


ell 


•9 


ri&sT  FKiNciPiBs  or 


■waX)  and  melt  the  whole)  adding  a  little  sweet  oil  or  turpentine 
to  preserve  its  consistency  to  the  state  of  honey;  add  an 
ounce  of  powdered  black  lead  to  this  composition,  and  the  barrel 
of  the  rifle  being  perfectly  clean,  the  composition  may  be  put 
on  like  paint,  very  thin,  laid  by  to  dry,  and  polished  to  a  smooth 
surface.  :  •  i,  /,«,  > 

To  give  the  barrel  a  red  or  brown  color,  add  red  lead  or 
ochrcf  instead  of  the  black  lead. 

To  make  the  barrel  green,  add  verdigrease,  which  must  be 
first  ground  in  oilj  to  make  the  barrel  blue,  pulverised  Prussian 


blue. 


'{,.  ■...  .I'.irii^  V ■iUi^i\^ 


iu.v.i  i4«;<'  "'iJJ  in: 


The  barrel  may  be  preserved  bright  and  safe  from  rust  by 
this  varnish,  without  adding  any  color  to  it ;  but  it  must  be 
laid  on  very  thin,  and  with  great  care ;  and  the  lock  plate  and 
parts  open  to  the  air,  muy  be  protected  from  rust  by  this  cam- 
phor varnish.    ■-  •  Vi-    ■  ■•■jiu. 

Every  rifle  should  have  a  stopper  for  the  muzzle,  and  a 
leather  cover  with  two  returning  straps  to  go  round  the  lock 
and  stock  two  or  three  times,  and  cover  the  whole  lock,  and  so 
formed  as  to  buckle  complete  to  it. 


§  8.  DBGSS  AND  EQUIPMENTS. 


,«MI' 


Uniformity  is  essential,  so  is  simplicity,  there  should  be  no- 
thing glaring  or  bright  about  the  rifleman  or  his  equipments. 

Warmth,  durability  and  sufiiciency,  so  that  the  body  may  be 
neither  exposed  to  unnecessary  inclemency  of  weather  nor  con* 
strained  in  the  free  exercise  of  limbs  and  muscles,  but  at  ease 
in  all  its  motions. 

His  arms,  shoulders,  elbows,  ribs,  his  knees,  the  calves  of  his 
legs  and  feet,  should  be  entirely  free  from  pressure  or  restraint ; 
for  this  reason  breeches  should  not  be  permitted  to  riflemen,  nor 
to  any  other  soldier,  neither  should  they  wear  low  quartered 
shoes  or  buckles  on  the  instep ;  they  should  wear  either  the 
hunting  or  Jeflerson  shoe,  with  a  flat  halt  inch  strap  to  wind 
once  round  the  small  of  the  leg  above  the  ancle,  and  with  u 
very  neat  buckle  on  the  outside  of  the  leg ;  or  with  a  lace 
to  be  laced,  the  pantaloons  reaching  the  ancle,  faced  with  leather 
for  six  inches,  and  open  lour  inches  on  the  outside  but  so  as  to 
lie  close  if  required. 


!   .     i\. 


:»': 


■-•*;*- ' 


I . 


>r  turpentioe 
ley;  add  an 
nd  the  barrel 
1  may  be  put 
d  to  a  smooth 

I  red  lead  or 

hich  must  be 
ised  Prussian 

from  rust  by 
ut  it  must  be 
lock  plate  and 
t  by  this  cam- 
muzzle)  and  a 
ound  the  lock 
»le  lock)  and  so 


should  be  no- 
i  equipments. 
ie  body  may  be 
eat  her  nor  con- 
leS)  but  at  ease 

he  calves  of  his 
lire  or  restraint; 
lo  riflemen,  nor 
•  low  quartered 
wear  either  the 
h  strap  to  wind 
iclt,  and  with  a 
or  with  a  lace 
ced  with  leather 
side  but  so  as  to 


itiFLE  DiscmnrE. 


99 


The  coat  should  be  short  and  well  fitted,  the  skirt  reaching  to 
the  line  of  the  fork ;  the  color  dark  green,  pantaloons  the  same } 
buttons  yellow ;  waistt  oat  of  the  same  color,  or  at  least  not 
white  on  service ;  color  black.  The  head  covering,  a  black  cap 
of  leather  with  a  vizor  in  front,  and  an  oil  cloth  of  24  inches 
square,  folded  within  the  crown,  to  be  let  down  on  an  emergen- 
cy of  rainy  weather  to  cover  the  neck  behind  ;  a  green  or  black 
plume....thecord  of  the  cap  and  the  regimental  letters  plain  and 
not  shewjr. 

The  knapsack  square)  with  a  square  case  for  a  blanket  form- 
ing the  cover)  and  the  cap  of  the  knapsack  to  contain  necessaries. 

His  arms  should  be  the  rifle)  with  a  short  sword  of  30  inches, 
worn  close  to  the  left  ude,  perpendicular  to  the  body)  and  susr 
ceptible  of  being  used  as  a  bayonet,  he  might  have  a  small  axe 
and  a  knife  in  his  powder  belt. 

A  cartridge  box  of  flexible  leather  contunlngtwo  rows  of  tin 
unsoldered  cases,  to  contain  30  or  36  rounds  ball  cartridge  ;  a 
double  pouch  slung  over  his  right  shoulder  and  under  his  left 
arm,  one  partition  containing  60  loose  well  smoothed  balls,  and 
in  the  other  partition  his  turn  screw,  knife,  scouring  brush,  oil 
rag,  patches.  Over  his  left  shoulder  and  under  his  right  arm 
hang  his  powder  horn  with  the  best  powder. 

Three  white  shirts,  two  flannel  shirts  with  sleeves  reaching 
four  inches  below  the  elbows,  and  opening  like  a  coat  at  the 
front,  closed  by  two  pair  of  tape  strings  at  the  breast  and  about 
the  waist ;  two  pair  of  flannel  drawers  reaching  to  the  calf  of 
the  leg  ;  two  pair  of  socks  for  winter  only  ....none  tor  be  worn 
from  June  to  October  The  feet  to  be  washed  in  cold  water 
every  morning  as  a  rule  of  discipline ;  Would  preserve  health, 
assure  vigor,  and  render  stockings  and  socks  totally  unneces- 

■. .  The  hair  cut  close  to  the  head  onc6  a  thonith. ' 

The  pantaloons  for  winterj  woollen  cloth  ;  for  summer  grey 
unbleached  linen  or  duck ;  and  for  an  undress  an  unbleached 
hunting  shirt  with  green  fringe ;  the  pantaloons  by  boiling 
with  vegetable  substances  may  be  made  a  dark  green  ;  or  with 
bark  a  dark  brown  ;  but  the  discipline  should  rigidly  guirrd 
against  dirt  with  such  colors,  ""■'t''"-^-    • 


i-AV  b^ifp 


'I      ■' 


i 


'\        \¥ 


% 


1,^ 

1 

1 

1 

1 

'? 


I 


.1 
■I 

i 


H 


-"S-tf.^ 


^  ■■fii 


'4 


;  ' 


■I  'Sf 


mi 


I.  i 


!  i 


I!    il 


\-f 


1      ."* 


^     i| 


lao 


fUUT  ?BINPIPL£S  OF 


$  9.  OF  EVOLUTIONS  PY  BUGLE  SIGNALS.  ^ 

It  now  remuns  tp  explain  a  very  important  object  in  the 
discipline  of  light  corps*  that  of  signals,  by  yrhich  the  various 
dittoes  may  be  performed  beyond  the  range  of  the  voice  by  sig- 
nals of  command. 

The  infantry  of  the  line  have  for  a  great  length  of  time  heen 
exercised  by  the  lie^t  of  the  drum ;  and  cavfdry  manoeuvres 
have  been  performed  hy  the  trufnpet.  Ki^e  porps  have  been 
moved  by  bugle  horn  signals ;  but  no  perfect  or  adequate  sys« 
tem  has  yet  been  adopted  in  our  service. 

The  present  is  an  attempt  to  introduce  tl^e  system  of  exer* 
else  and  movement  by  signal  to  public  attention ;  and  to  adapt 
it  to  th^  convenience  of  troops*  however  remote  from  each  other. 
To  this  chapter  is  annexed,  a  series  of  sixty^one  dgnals  adapted 
to  the  bugle,  on  a  regular  scale  of  musical  notation  and  time. 
Wh^re  buglers  are  not  acquainted  with  music  so  as  to  play  at 
sight,  the  notes  may  be  performed  on  a  violin  or  flute,  and  the 
bugler  taught  from  the  ear,  by  freq«ent  repetition.  An  cAcer 
^oing  into  service  n^ay  by  a  series  of  signals  by  the  bugle 
eorrespond  urith  a  distant  party,  having  previously  arranged  the 
signi0catlon  to  be  given  to  each  ugnal.         ,,{',      ' .    '  :^  i  . . 

A  review  of  troops  in  ordinary  discipline  may  also  be  con- 
drifted  by  signal  in  the  same  manner ;  a  previous  order  being 
m^dp,  an^  the  signals  arranged  to  the  signals  as  numbered. 

A  bM(;le,horn  yi;e\i  blown  may  be  distinctly. heard  in  any  kind 
of  country  by  day  three  mU^a  Its,  importance  for  a  medium 
of  communication  between  an  army  and  its  out  posts,  is  there- 
foi;e  obvious,  sf^nce  the  human  voice  cannot  be  distinctly,  heard 
even  in  a  clear,  day,  from  one  flank  to  another  of  a  large  bat- 
talion. 

This  bugle  has  been  universally  used  for  light  troops,  and 
it  is  therefore  proper  to  provide  some  method  by  which  there 
may  be  a  determined  system  of  bugle  signals.  The  following 
explanatioi^s  and  rule^  are  therefore  laid  down,  and  a  series 
of  musical  signals  is  proyided  and  tmmderedf  or  objects  to  be 
accomplished  corresponding  in  number  thereto  are  annexed. 

As  signals  of  the  bugle  are  intended  to  supply  the  insuffi- 
ciency of  the  voice  to  communicate  at  a  distance  ;  it  is  only 
naed  where  the  voice  cannot  be  so  well  heard. 


.,.„. 


SIFItE  DISCIFLIKE. 


iOl 


|ect  in  the 
he  various 
ice  by  8ig- 

timeh^en 

i  hftye  been 
equate  sys* 

ita  of  exer* 

knd  to  adapt 
I  each  other. 
naU  adapted 
m  and  time, 
as  to  play  at 
lutei  and  the 
,    An  cAcer 
>y  the  bugle 
arranged  the 

also  be  con* 
8  order  being 
lumbered. 
•d  in  any  kind 
or  a  medium 
ostS)  is  there* 
stinctly  heard 
a  large  bat* 

It  troopS)  and 
which  there 
The  following 
and  a  series 
r  objects  to  be 
re  annexed. 
)ly  the  insuffi- 
;e ;   it  is  only 


Another  method  for  out  posts  acting  at  night»  where  the 
voice  'm  required  not  to  be  heard}  is  supplied  by  a  whistle,  for 
which  a  sch^    "  of  musical  signals  is  also  annexed. 

Signals  I  ic  bugle  should  be  simple  and  figniiicantj  and 
the  signals  ior  contrary  orders  should  be  as  dissimilar,  so  that 
an  ear  not  the  least  musical  cannot  mistaHe  one  for  the  other. 

No  command  executed  by  the  bugle  should  be  begun  to  be 
executed  until  the  bugle  has  finished  the  signal. 

The  signals  should  be  classed  into  two  descriptions....The 
first  class  to  consist  of  all  the  signals,  which  being  given  from 
the  place  of  superior  command,  should  be  repeated  by  all  the 
buglers  of  the  line,  or  that  wing  or  division  of  the  line ;  such 
&te....rouae,...aaaemble..,.march,..Mdvance.,..akirmi*h...^re....halt.... 
retreat..,.cea»e  ^ring....dufierse,..,to  annul  a  firevioua  aignal.... 
Other  signals  may  not  be  repeated  as  they  appertain,  only  to  a 
corps  detached  or  to  the  whole,  and  when  understood  require 
no  repetition. 

All  bugle  sounds  are  to  be  considered  as  referring  to  the 
actual  state  of  the  body  for  which  the  signal  is  made,  at  the 
moment  it  is  sounded.  For  example....the  word  halt  being 
signified  by  the  bugle,  while  a  corps  or  company  is  retreatingy 
the  halt  mi^st  be  understood  in  the  very  position  they  then 
are  ;  or  if  the  signal  be  to  the  right  about^  while  retreating, 
or  if  advancing,  it  must  be  executed  as  ordered.  The  retreat 
is  to  be  considered  the  same  as  coming  to  the  right  or  Itft 
about,  but  if  the  word  retreat  be  the  signal,  the  ofiicer  advanced 
may  choose  and  order  the  mode  of  retreat,  whether  in  sections^ 
by  alternate  files,  or  by  single  files,  firing  and  retiring. 

The  actual  front  of  formation  need  not  be  attended  to  so  par* 
ticularly  in  the  advanced  ordfr  ^  only  that  it  must  be  taken  care 
that  co7»fianie$,  extending^  do  not  intermix  and  carry  oiF  eac) 
other's  files,  ^       ^dT  -i    '     ^  ;.u'v>i„t>.  ;    --U 

The  halt  is  considered  as  annulling  every  previous  signal. 
When  there  are  buglers  with  advanced  parties,  if  the  men 
hear  a  sound  from  the  main  body,  they  must  not  change  their 
disposition  by  that  sound,  until  their  officer  has  ordered  it  to  be 
repeated,  or  ordered  it  to  be  obeyed. 

As  this  scheiVie  ma^  be  accommodated  to  the  various  move- 
ments of  every  description  of  troops,  only  by  selecting  the 


,     I 


iM 


■^*'i»( 


11  %\ 


^1 


'■•n.*- 


«■      :•■) 


■I  fc'  fcw^  ^*^*fen"t  ■■»»«i''<n«^*'^^*^* ' 


i 


II 


'i  it 


I   ■ 


,  ,      I 


f  MM 


1Q2 


FIRST  PRINCIPLBS  Of 


leading  orders  for  manoeuvre,  and  judiciously  adapting  the 
signals  thereto ;  these  numbers  are  not  offered  here  as  exactly 
the  fittest  for  the  several  signals ;  but  the  scale  of  signals  in 
musical  notes  being  once  adopted,  the  most  proper  signals  may 
indue  time  be  established. 

Some  of  these  signals  are  taken  from  the  most  retent  modem 
military  music ;  and  the  number  might  be  augmented,  if  it 
vrere  not  preferable  to  limit  them  to  a  few ;  on  account  of  the 
general  unacquaintance  of  buglers  with  musical  notee. 


BUOIiB  SIGNALS. 


1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9 

10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16 
3/. 
18. 
19. 
20. 
•ll. 
23. 
23. 
24. 
25. 
26. 
•27. 
28. 
29. 

no. 

.11. 


Alarm. 

Rouse.         ^ 

March. 

Skirmish. 

Extend.  ^.     . . 

Close.  ' 

To  the  right. 

To  the  left. 

To  the  centre. 

Send  out  an  advance  guard. 

Pursue  th«  enemy. 

The  charge 

Cease  firing.        •' 

Retire— or.  r^trwut.. 

Assemble. 


.It 


Disperse. 

Run. 

Rally.     ; 

Halt. 

Load. 

Fire. 

Order  arms 

Trail  arms. 

Advance. 

Call  in  advance  guard, 

Call  in  Skirmishers. 

Conceal  yourselves. 

Spring  up. 

Fire  advancing.      ->: 

Fire  retreating. 

Retreat  and  extend. 

Retreat  and  close. 


lis     I    ;        -.i' 


■  f. 


•it 


33. 

34. 

35 

36. 

37. 

38. 

39. 

40. 

4t 

42. 

43. 

44. 

45. 

46 

47. 

48. 


49. 
50. 
51. 
52. 
53. 
54. 
55. 
56. 
ST. 
58. 
59. 
60. 
61. 


Form  the  chain. 
Form  sections. 
Form  cchellons. 
Form  companies. 
Form  line. 
Form  column. 
Form  square. 
Interrogative. 
Affirmative. 
Negative. 
Annul. 

The  enemy  is  infantry. 
The  enemy  is  cavalry. 
The  enemy  has  riflemen. 
The  enemy  has  artillery. 
The  enemy  is  moving. 

To  the  right. 

To  the  left. 

To  the  centre. 
Adjutants  eall  for  orders. 
Buglers  cad. 
Onll. 

Fatigue,   j  mhi  j^'x 
Forage. 
RaUong. 

Prepare  to  parade. 
Officers  assemhie. 
Officers*  dinner. 
The  Uttoo— 1st  post. 
The  Uttoo— 2d  post. 
The  tattoo— 3d  post. 
Setting  the  watch. 


'  t 


i  Hi 


ill 


■     '  I        ; 


■.5Jil,flJf    i'-i'U     "Lx!  .s«*J*«  y»f*   (fifili'';      .  .;    .     ' 


I*- 


8.; 


I0.| 


12.: 


14. 

18. 
r-o.'i 


X  , 


I"  i  !    i 


GAMUT. 


BUGLE  HORN  SIGNALS. 


[)ting  the 
ts  exactly 
iignals  in 
gnalsmay 

nt  modem 
nted,  if  it 
int  of  the 


••'        •'      jv     • 

i.. 

''   .■ 

■.;'iTx 

l>   ' 

r.     .  t;,' 

rantry, 
tralry. 
iflemen. 
rtUlery. 
mn(f. 
he  right 
the  left, 
the  centre 
>r  orders. 

♦ 

;v»u 

,  ;fjT 

'-.  ^  -^ 

;  l.il 

ie.    *»  '•■•' 
e.     -' 

•  1  ■ 

pOBt. 

post, 
potft. 
cb. 

■ ,  - 1 ' 

1 

,  ..•■;■ 

•ijii 

'h 

^.   , 


i  '' 


f"-S 


iji  it  ill 

M!  if:  lit 


ir*      ■ 


'ZO4 


lA/:.H.i^   /.  JiOH  Mi 


•^°-^^ 


^■•^eB=to 


^ri-Hr^^JH--HrH-^^ 


_* 


igg^pggpTl^^ 


"■p=gg;ip?si^s^ 


...^^s^sa^^^ 


^..pj^^^saaqq?:^ 


j^O- 


f^^^iilpip^^! 


los 


1^ 


m  ' 


/ 1     ' 


1  (, 


* 


i  \       n 


'»l 


I 


n 


1 06 


»w<rfi\t  f'-fjjjEf^^ 


i^ipli 


,.^=trF37=p^3^ 


3  r!\ 


^^^^^^1» 


^^m^m^^m\ 


1 


57 


PiSiiigiiilii^i" 


as 


P 


(Si 


as 


m^- 


^1' 


(!\ 


Ssl' 


107 


TATTOO. 

First  Part,  in  Camp  or  Garrison. 


^^^m^^ 


^  ^  ^ 


Second  Part, 


g^^j^g^^ffl^Fffr 


iS^^I^^S 


i^ 


H  i 


1  i  i 


h/ 


'I  .', 


I; 


«o8 


!■  .     ' 


*  r  {  a:  ! 


SIGNALS  WITH  THE  WHISTLE. 

Discovering  an  enemy.  -^ 

Take  ground  to  the  right.  ^ 


g-jn 


P=r:p 


^f« 


Take  ground  to  the  left. 


nmrrrmrrTfmfTrfffq 


[ 


Advana- 


^4£gtf^t 


Retreat. 


Halt. 


ir  nr-HF 


^ 


-<'. -'-.I... 


Commence  Firing. 


^iSB 


ff=:ff 


r=gg=i' 


^ 


Cease  Firing. 


FFFFFFS^a^ 


Qosc. 


i 


"O- 


3: 


3: 


321 


33: 


\ 


a\ 


rial'. 


m 


m 


'■■.>*, 


!       ' 


Marching  inFiYrs  /h^m  l/u-rfu/,/j. 


1  ! 


I    3 


ft^miny  to  efir  Jh^i 


h-  tAr  c 


'l^^r^i 


'Uf. 


r=.iUT;,    --I—         .      .    ;  ..M« 


■;;j'>%'..g 


''^,-::x^7~ 


•1 


M 


I    ■.■i.\-i 


5       I' 

'■■J; 


.  s 


)^  ^  b  ^   ^.   k  -''   in  ^ 


1  %    i  \  ^i^  i^ 


Vy  iit»  -■?!'■ 


'1! 


V   JkS!^ 


Mi 


^1 


1 1, 


i 


A 


>  i 

t 

r 

\  t 

.'|8' 

i. 

f 

Hfi 

' -n 

\} 

,:| 

\'n 


»->'.    M. 


'     1 


^  4 


■ -^^       .^.  , 


-:s   -;,:.^»,-.   ;J^;;^^. 


iM       *».•    *•' 


■**:  "j^'    *?••*( 


1^    •^■ 


* 


^1 


■(?Ki/(|[';' 


:  ■  ui 

ji.^;^ 


is*  •**. 


ji,  ,^^  JL,  *^  «»«!  i^-'-  f': 


■  IS  H  Nt 


\v   ..V 


>v^M?-««^- 


:^-  i*'  t 


'        •■ 


•r-     -= 


1=^ 


Plate.  4*. 


: 


Advancing  in  Filer  /horn  the  Center  o/'Subdtvistons . 


rig.3. 


JFcrmit^  tu  tikeFivnt. 
iytheOm^ue. 


r'^.^'.i';ff,iiJi'i.'i'A.'A;,%;  J  y,j',.»T:r' 


►  •**■• 


im 

M 

1   ;    i,\ 

:i 

]r 


i.>  1  '■  ili 


1  In 

1 

A     ?      %    % 


«      K 


'  *,  ■ 

'!S' 

■; 

^  i''! 

r^ 

.  •, 

';\ 

I'rt 


^       •*-. 


f 


II      I    fl. 


i 


« 


ft  f . 


I.-* 


i 


J^     ii 


j-  r 


I. 


.■-  I 


/*. 


Hv-»^ 


1^  ^ 


f  fj 


^.. 


"■^4.' 


4-': 


1  '  t 


Fig.?. 


1   • 


Figd 


Sf(irTm'.fhuu^  with  Tht'  Hr'ffliT  Plulro/e.r  in  /hmt. 


I         \\ 


w 

•  .J 
f. 


i  1 


•■''"  "»>«f'^'^' 


tZ^X 


T7 — ::.'■ 


iiii 


t'l 


hi'"', 


( A 


lit 


t    s 


'♦t,     ••'H_.     ;■*», 


t^^J 


V  ■ 


1    \ 


^.^U,^i,>?i^,'*» 


r-'.  1 


''<-:''<i  f^^^f^'^^^'^nc,  ^ear,naT7..Ii^ar.U.ry  funul^l^^^ 


Rtfjfhr  and  f^/Yhami/lles  e.nunn^  the  retreat  cY^tTu-  Compu 


tpany. 


fig. 3 


Faced  to  the B^ about  h-uvin^  the  Center  division  /route J. 


Figt. 


Center  i/ivt^ion  avtinff  it,F  S/o rmish ers  tind 


I'l'i'eritifftke  retreat  of  the  Cvf/tpany. 


-^■r»^~^- 


n;^i- 


J^**  '  l1K|li>ll*^i 


'  u 


■ 


!  I.        O         :ii 


I       il^ 


,4        P.       *,: 

.■A.    A     ^k 


M 


>   / 


''I'H 


1  z   ^' 


*V'    V'''     i^^'     5     '■ 


1'^. 


J 


!'■'!  I 


^,  ^   |i^     ^.;     ^     . 


jr. 


If,* 


iM5, 


f'      ^. 


■V 


V-.1,        1 


f 


l: 


M 


i<         -    ■  ^ 


^■* "  iA 


ff 


\'l 


\  \  \ 


>  n 


m 


J4 


^ .  ' '  .1. 


.\\' 


\*»».— 


:.:^x^.::iw.  ;s-. 


,-■;•*¥'*• 


i 


To  ILrknd  froni  lifjht  iefl  or  ceiUre 

a:::cs::a::ia::M,:M::ci:::is:::ta:.:ai::;a..::ra  /<<^a 

^i)  tiie  left  extend 


PL  I. 


V 


S'\ 


T'tt/.'J. 


>>      " w 9 ]£'JX''^'^  ^ A.    A    A 

H»:i<Ca«i7l2l^:4laji'l3....13l IS 01 01 IS .31    IS 

IS a :ia:..:Mt :s::. m:;;:M:'.s.  ::ci::h,:::hx 


fi-om  the  (tnfre  ext^d  "iffA 

ci'  'nt jai :i^' ]A'iriA*i7M-«'4'ia»'/i!si'''Ci'^^^ 

:ii:::ia::::ii,::ia::::ra::::is:::is"::a;:::^ 


r/te'  Comfyany  rehralin^  in  dose  order  across  a   PImn 


i   ^     !P    JH 


.■A 


FioA 


•    I 


Formaiiori  of  the  Chmn 


tJ===jliH^S;:tl 


:l^ 


:ll! 


:;*i-:::;;;;;**:;;:;;:»6 


''V-y 


I       ""'' 


^ 


A'  Paw 


4     3    t    I  ; 


4     i 

u 


I    K 


.■.-— Tl.^nEST^" 


,/       ^■WllWl   l.i   IPIIIIIII.  iiM^I.   ' 


1  !> 


A.V\ 


•«  avSi  ;  ■:»  ^>\  VA\>v\  'vV'  i\  ^ 


\  ■  V  S-; , . '    >,\ » 


m    ^":  ^'  i\  . 

y»»X-  >'.'!    S\*-   ■    \'i':, 


'-ffj.  «?f   t^i    r"    r    '^-    i*j  '#!'    r"    s;'  J^' 


^  -I'll 


y.^'.'    '■':    5*^    tt,    Wji    &:-"i^.:   ^:-    r?  as " 


M 


',  \ . », 


ta 


7,?' 


t*% 


5" 


vw\»i^V  '«V.\'.M    sv..'v-V: 


h 


Hitle. 


PI.  2. 


I'„j.4. 


To  Fire  in  advoM'CUiq 


■■v}\  ■":  ;'<i;  ;»:  :«  ;?:  H.         :/.:  :"■■  S  :  :• ;         ;i  ; 


Hi  iBi  iBi  iHi  \E\  iBi  iBi  ^BI  ;Bi  m^ 


m 


V:\ 


1  ■ 


ri    n    pf! 


ri 


Jruntl'onk 


To  Fire'  irv  relrealin^ 


J''ij).  !>■ 


m    m 


m  \9\  ijir  i^ifr;  ii' 


6 


R     R 


•  FnntHaiA' 
fff-Mmrdf 


ei 


feieiieJidta     bIb    ijEikiBidiii 


■^■l 


'.'^'■V 


1 


f  ^ 

i 


i 

7'^>  ■ 


N'^l 


ft 


,f    -i*,  •»        '^i± 


M  ■  i.  .< 


Ci  . 


tii 


I  .'7         »,;.  ,.a» 


U'4         I.  J  Ci'* 


•^ 


:ii?      • 


•o 


pr 


b 


t.JS 


Rifle. 


Of  Sldinrvifhing 


m.  .7. 


::aeL-i;.m;;;:-;m;;:::: 


*   i" 


Fi- 


ii.::;:B>r     .;.:i3L::::v.i 


i::::;-:E;::::;K:::,n.:;-.|:EW 


*  ^.. 


m.ii.w't.a.-i- 

wpwmmw 


j£>£at//,iii  gy  o\f4.t  t  i 


prwwrwpippw 


^^r^^-j; 


:^:=:^^^ 


J» 


L. 


Jo 


-f 


I'nfft 


>'  ,,.^*''*^" 


'■^^^Wfc^; 


»J| 


*.c 


'"%. 


..'!!iSi»"*?" 


'I 


1 


!  * 


i".    .*\ 


ni^ 


I    ?:<3     S    31     !^     3 

IM:.  "3    ■  ^     -^       -^      -^' 


'  J   I' 


» 


i,  ;^ 


t^'^ 


I 


■■^ 


I 


Si   ! 


II 


i 


1  ■  } 

'^ 

1 

M   j) 

i. 

1 

^.^^,  *:. 


«-.;■ 


ii»^^ 


Hifie. 


ForynaUatv  of  Uw  Oi  '  n 


Pl.-f. 


Ji^/fl.  \ 


^1 


:  ! 


..  :4  r.v- 


C? 


■Kl.  ■".... I W W 


S< 


i! 


■.is 


Al 


:iA 


The  fornvevtion  a*id.  dUnosiUmv  of  a.  i-oinfuuiy  of' Riflemen, 
or  IvgTit  Infmury  whi^ie  to  form,  an  advanced.  ^luircL 


«« 


l^e    *♦ 


*■* **  1,|<4i7 •♦•♦■ 


i      i 


4> 


•P»i- 


■**■■ 


fig  It. 


-^==^==^=S=^Pacc. 


•*-*-ci:it- ** ** 


■%.: 


A<HM  .«M  4%  •    > 


-■     '-1 


-^-,  ,^.^*.- 


'"•^  i,  *  - 


-::zi^. 


J 


I 


■«.T 


vy. 


it  i 

1  'i  ■  • 

.« 

« 


(m 


t  i.  i 


'> 


il 


■I  V 


^ 


4j 


!  I' 


•  ^  iV. 


*  « 


^-^i 


t/^ 


>^ 


•\ 


y^ 


:<^^ 


%. 


.,    ,    ••>.•  .. 


«.!.  *  ^ 


*^., 


n'.- 


j.  *' 


■tt 


» 

RXFL 

# 

/ 

** 

E    ' 


M 


•  '•-4fe»^'»ifi;- 


■'H,^- 


^'■*t»-«w-' 


♦;■ 


■  jiiB^it-  .•.■^*ft-^-,*tt,.*f:0*?N^-»*i"i  Mursu'Vi'i**  ■■         *■=    iv*.- 


:  w^  i^i: 


■«,-.¥ -iJ»r.     .;.)W»II?« 


-.Vv^.  '■ 


■P-     ':' 


si  ■fe   a  .'w  .Ji  A  :4  *i 


.■'I*"' 


^i^'':Vii 


Ma'- 


(»: 

* 

i'.| 

^        ; 

! 

i  * 

I> 

-•^ 


.  «  .'      V,    '  ,    K  '  _-(,ii««"t 


i  >. 


,'».,)' 


I/' 


I: 


i: 


t 


-xr-^'i 


!! 

-VJtT 

'  1 

jsasiiJife.,  ■  , 

i 

■  t 

4> 

f     • 


.     ">    '.     ■  I 


J 


^■% 

*' 


■I 

'A 


^(         ^ 


iassivsa 


^^>rsa   ■M:^;;' 


■.<*'     .-n^a     iWfl  '       ffci'sl 


r;,a 


^li^  ^^»*'*^  *    *,.-tJT^«- 


ll 


'J 


» ' 


r.. 


jj^jg;,-,'  '^j--'^.i.,.-,if^.^ 


.',   -MS  i^Ul 


i 


.'<'»*S.4:f*.«i,.:!^t^,r-K**if 


;*^-. 


V    ,'^11 


f 

!- 


*'S.?¥« 


■  ^'mm- 


i         \ 


%^"-Mi. 


^*-i'i 


'iJM**:^ 


'I 

■I 

f'% 

■■i  'r 


;        ;* 

w 

;-    ''1 

;  ?, 

1  -'■■■ 

«;:* 


: 


/;%3 


:*  :-,J 


ijff'- 


a 


■^ 


•W-v.  -v-f,^^;.,,,,^,.     •^_, 


.*>><*» 


,1 
■I 


'T 


I     !     ( 


■'    1 


\ 


V 


u 

I  i 


^i 


u 


•»-!»      ^~» 


PLATR  XI. 


Riflemen. 


'  ^SfTii*"^!^^^  "W*^^ 


'•^,. 


Riflemen. 


I 


t... 


'm-^ 


'K' 


It*. 


Riflemen. 


PLATE  Xn 


jrt^.-/. 


Jfu^.2. 


n 
i 


}i 

■% 

f 

■h 

t 

;  i: 

'  1 

■» 


« 


t 


l« 


1 

I 


T    ■^./'^ 


W 


\ 


Mi* 

V, 


'h. 


VJS 


'■■    '  ■    '"'^ -f 


!f 


■     !l 


!  r 


ll 


^^' 


I4ii'f'>'        .^ 


4.4Ju^  M^ ' 


ii».-Wviwi^(  .-jf^^....  ,.^'^.i 


^i<^*  .V]  /,J', 


■  ^.■'"^'■■^••irtfcr.^^itov. 


-**9  ti'»»j^  t.~^j  J 


fl- 


Nl*'   ili         'J     .f'-S 


i«  , 


i^r 


►  •!        i 


V 


1r    I 


PLATE  Xm. 


Riflemen. 


A  h^< 


\  'I 


■4*"' 


f  I  I 


c 


M^.2 


■•Hi.. 
3j 


^'^'%,,^8^l# 


D 


X> 


^-T^' 


Riflemen-. 


&^ 


